Nissan - ROGUE - Owners Manual - 2020 - 2020

2020 ROGUE OWNER’S MANUAL and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle. Owner’s Manual Supplement The information contained within this supplement revises or adds to the following information within the 2019 Qashqai, 2020 Altima and 2020 Rogue Owner’s Manual: ∙ “WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS” in the “Illustrated table of contents” section ∙ ∙ ∙ “WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in the “Instruments and controls” section “WARNING LIGHTS” in the “WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” section in the “Instruments and controls” section “INDICATOR LIGHTS” in the “WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” section in the “Instruments and controls” section Read carefully and keep in vehicle. Printing: August 2019 Publication No. SU20EA 0T32U0 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS Brake warning light (red) WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS 2 or Brake warning light (red) or Electronic parking brake warning light (yellow) (if so equipped) or or Electronic parking brake warning light (yellow) (if so equipped) 3 WARNING LIGHTS or Brake warning light (red) This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems. Parking brake indicator (if so equipped) When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied. Low brake fluid warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following: 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. For additional information, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Doit-yourself” section of this manual. 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. WARNING ∙ Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous. ∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel. ∙ If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. or Electronic parking brake warning light (yellow) (if so equipped) The electronic parking brake system warning light functions for the electronic parking brake system. If the warning light illuminates, it may indicate the electronic parking brake system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to “Parking brake” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. INDICATOR LIGHTS or Electronic parking brake indicator light (red) (if so equipped) This light illuminates when the electronic parking brake system is operating. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the electronic parking brake warning light illuminates. When the engine is started and the parking brake is released, the warning light turns off. If the parking brake is not released, the electronic parking brake warning light remains illuminated. Ensure the electronic parking brake warning light has turned off before driving. If the electronic parking brake warning light illuminates or flashes while the electronic parking brake system warning light or (yellow) illuminates, it may indicate that the electronic parking brake system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to “Parking brake” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING WARNING Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. FOREWORD This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle. A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual explains details about maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, and clarify your rights under your state’s lemon law. When you require any service or have any questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them. In addition to factory-installed options, your vehicle may also be equipped with additional accessories installed prior to delivery. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped. It is important that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures, READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY warnings, cautions and instructions concerning proper use of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle and/or accessory. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped. Before driving your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle. WARNING IMPORTANT REMINDERS! SAFETY INFORMATION Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers! ∙ NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. ∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions. ∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you. ∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat. ∙ ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle. ∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual for important safety information. For descriptions specified for all-wheel drive models, an AWD mark is placed at the beginning of the applicable sections/items. As with other vehicles with features for off-road use, failure to operate all-wheel drive models correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. For additional information, refer to “Driving safety precautions” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car because it has a higher center of gravity for off-road use. As with other vehicles with features of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. For additional information, refer to “On-pavement and off-road driving precautions”, “Avoiding collision and rollover” and “Driving safety precautions” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety, emissions or durability and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties. WARNING Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses the port during normal driving, for example remote insurance company monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or engine reprogramming, may cause interference or damage to vehicle systems. We do not recommend or endorse the use of any aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically approved by NISSAN. The vehicle warranty may not cover damage caused by any aftermarket plug-in device. WHEN READING THE MANUAL This manual includes information for all features and equipment available on this model. Features and equipment in your vehicle may vary depending on model, trim level, options selected, order, date of production, region or availability. Therefore, you may find information about features or equipment that are not included or installed on your vehicle. All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications, performance, design or component suppliers without notice and without obligation. From time to time, NISSAN may update or revise this manual to provide Owners with the most accurate information currently available. Please carefully read and retain with this manual all revision updates sent to you by NISSAN to ensure you have access to accurate and upto-date information regarding your vehicle. Current versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any updates can also be found in the Owner section of the NISSAN website at https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/ navigation/manualsGuide. If you have questions concerning any information in your Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. For contact information, re- fer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner’s Manual. IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways: WARNING This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely. CAUTION This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully. APD1005 If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this” or “Do not let this happen.” If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle. Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action. Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration. CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply. For additional information, refer to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate/”. © 2019 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC. All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc. NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM NISSAN CARES . . . Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs. However, if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number: For U.S. customers 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261) The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information: You can write to NISSAN with the information at: – Your name, address, and telephone number For U.S. customers Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003 or via e-mail at: [email protected] – Vehicle identification number (attached to the top of the instrument panel on the driver’s side) – Date of purchase For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122 – Current odometer reading – Your NISSAN dealer’s name – Your comments or questions OR For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 or via e-mail at: [email protected] If you prefer, visit us at: www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers) We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle. Table of Contents Illustrated table of contents 0 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 Instruments and controls 2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4 Starting and driving 5 In case of emergency 6 Appearance and care 7 Do-it-yourself 8 Maintenance and schedules 9 Technical and consumer information 10 Index 11 0 Illustrated table of contents Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8 Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9 AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-46) Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) (P. 1-46) Front seat belt with pretensioner(s) and shoulder height adjuster (if so equipped) (P. 1-12, 1-46) Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-8) Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-46) 2nd row center position top tether strap (located on ceiling) (P. 1-24) 2nd row outboard seat top tether strap anchor (located on bottom of seatback) (P. 1-24) LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) (P. 1-24) Folding 2nd row bench (P. 1-2) Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag (P. 1-46) Seats (P. 1-2) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. LII2549 0-2 Illustrated table of contents EXTERIOR FRONT 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. LII2612 Engine hood (P. 3-25) Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-45) Wiper blades (P. 8-20) Windshield (P. 8-20) Windshield-washer fluid (P. 8-11) Front camera (if so equipped) (P. 5-35, 5-40, 5-124, 5-132) Power windows (P. 2-71) Door locks (P. 3-5) NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) (P. 3-10) Remote Keyless Entry (P. 3-2, 3-8) Keys (P. 3-2) Mirrors (P. 3-38) Side view camera (if so equipped) (P. 4-11) Tire pressure (P. 8-32) Flat tire (P. 6-3) Tire chains (P. 8-32) Fog light switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-48) Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-48) Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28) LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system (P. 2-48) Front view camera (if so equipped) (P. 4-11) Front radar (P. 5-124, 5-132) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. Illustrated table of contents 0-3 EXTERIOR REAR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-45) Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-5) Fuel-filler door (P. 3-33) Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-33) Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2) Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28) Rearview camera (P. 4-3, 4-11) Liftgate release (P. 3-26) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. LII2541 0-4 Illustrated table of contents PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 1. Glove box (P. 2-63) 2. Map lights (P. 2-75) 3. Power panoramic moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-73) 4. Console box (P. 2-63) 5. Luggage hooks (P. 2-63) 6. Center armrest (P. 1-2) 7. Cup holders (P. 2-63) 8. Sun visors (P. 3-37) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. LIC3720 Illustrated table of contents 0-5 INSTRUMENT PANEL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. LII2516 0-6 Illustrated table of contents Vent (P. 4-28) Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn signal switch (P. 2-48) Meters and gauges (P. 2-4) Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-11) Vehicle information display (P. 2-21) Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-45) Rear wiper washer switch (P. 2-45) Ignition switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-14) Push-button ignition switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-15) Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2) Radio* Navigation system (if so equipped)* Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-46) Glove box (P. 2-63) Heater and air conditioning controls (P. 4-29, 4-37) Power outlet (P. 2-60) Shift lever (P. 5-24) Auxiliary jack* USB port* 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. Front passenger air bag status light (P. 1-46) Cruise control switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-65) Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-67) Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System* ProPILOT Assist switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-91) Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-46) Horn (P. 2-55) Tilt and telescopic steering (P. 3-36) Control panel and vehicle information display switches (P. 2-21) Hood release (P. 3-25) Fuel door release (P. 3-33) SPORT mode switch (P. 5-34) ECO mode switch (P. 5-34) Liftgate instrument panel switch (P. 3-26) All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-58) Steering Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped) (P. 2-57) 21. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (P. 2-58) Dynamic driver assistance switch (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped) (P. 2-57) Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-56) Instrument brightness control (P. 2-48) Twin trip odometer reset switch (P. 2-5) *: Refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual. Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. Illustrated table of contents 0-7 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS QR25DE engine 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4) Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-6) Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-10) Battery (P. 8-13) Air cleaner (P. 8-18) Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-23) Radiator cap (P. 8-4) Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-6) Drive belt location (P. 8-17) Windshield-washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-11) Engine cover removed for clarity. Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. LDI2809 0-8 Illustrated table of contents WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS Warning light or Name Page Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light 2-12 Warning light or Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system warning light (if so equipped) 2-12 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (if so equipped) 2-12 Brake warning light (red) 2-13 Name Page Charge warning light 2-13 Electronic parking brake warning light (yellow) (if so equipped) 2-13 Low tire pressure warning light 2-14 Master warning light 2-15 Power steering warning light 2-16 Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system warning light (if so equipped) Seat belt warning light and chime Warning light Indicator light Name Page Supplemental air bag warning light 2-17 Name Page All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK indicator light (if so equipped) 2-17 Automatic brake hold indicator light (green) (if so equipped) 2-18 2-18 2-16 Automatic brake hold indicator light (white) (if so equipped) 2-18 2-17 Electronic parking brake indicator light (red) (if so equipped) or or Illustrated table of contents 0-9 Indicator light Name Page Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped) Name Page 2-18 Slip indicator light 2-20 2-18 Turn signal/ hazard indicator lights 2-20 Front passenger air bag status light 2-18 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light 2-20 High Beam Assist indicator light (green) (if so equipped) High beam indicator light (blue) 2-18 Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) 2-19 Security indicator light 2-19 Side light and headlight indicator light (green) 2-20 0-10 Illustrated table of contents Indicator light 1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Front manual seat adjustment (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3 Front power seat adjustment (if so equipped for driver’s seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Rear bench seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Flexible seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Head restraints/headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Adjustable head restraint/headrest components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Non-adjustable head restraint/ headrest components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10 Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10 Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15 Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15 Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15 Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15 Seat belt extenders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21 Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21 Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Rear-facing child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29 Rear-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31 Forward-facing child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34 Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). . . . . . . . . . . 1-46 Precautions on SRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . 1-65 Supplemental air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . 1-66 SEATS ∙ Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. ARS1152 WARNING ∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. ∙ For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. ∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked. 1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets. ∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle. ∙ The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased. CAUTION When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damage. FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped) Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For additional information about adjusting the seats, refer to the steps outlined in this section. LRS2160 LRS2161 Forward and backward Reclining Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the bar to lock the seat in position. To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever up and lean your body forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in the P (Park) position. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3 LRS3217 Seat lifter (driver’s seat) Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust the seat height until the desired position is achieved. LRS2662 FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped for driver’s seat) Operating tips ∙ The power seat motor has an autoreset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds then reactivate the switch. ∙ Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery. 1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Forward and backward Moving the switch as shown will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Reclining Move the recline switch as shown until the desired angle is obtained. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park). LRS2784 LRS2270 Seat lifter Lumbar support Move the switch as shown to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion. The lumbar support feature provides adjustable lower back support to the driver. Move the switch as shown to adjust the seatback lumbar area. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5 The recline feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park). WARNING ∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked. LRS2717 Outboard seats REAR BENCH SEAT ADJUSTMENT Forward and backward 1 up and hold it Pull the center of the bar 䊊 while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the bar to lock the seat in position. Reclining To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever 2 and lean back. To bring the seatback 䊊 2 up and lean your forward, pull the lever 䊊 body forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position. ∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. ∙ For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. 1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2713 ARMRESTS The rear bench center armrest is locked in the up position. To lower the armrest, pull the armrest down as shown. To return the armrest to the up position, push up on the armrest until it is in the full up position. FLEXIBLE SEATING WARNING ∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seats when they are in the fold-down position. In a collision, people riding in these areas without proper restraints are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. ∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. ∙ Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt. ∙ Do not fold down the rear seats when occupants are in the rear seat area or any luggage is on the rear seats. – Make sure that the seat path is clear before moving the seat. – Be careful not to allow hands or feet to get caught or pinched in the seat. ∙ Head restraints/headrests should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Always replace and adjust them properly if they have been removed for any reason. ∙ If the head restraints/headrests are removed for any reason, they should be securely stored to prevent them from causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident. ∙ When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop. ∙ Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. LRS2754 Folding the rear bench seat To fold the rear bench seat flat for maximum cargo hauling: 1. Lower or remove the rear head restraints/headrests and store them properly so they are not loose in the vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this section. 2. Stow the rear seat belts in the seat belt hooks found on the sides of the vehicle. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7 HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS A 3. Lift up on the seatback release lever 䊊 on the top of the outboard seats to fold the seatbacks flat. 4. To return the rear bench seats to a seating position, push up on the seatback until it latches in place. WARNING Head restraints/headrests supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjustable head restraints/headrests must be adjusted properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint/headrest stalk, except for genuine NISSAN accessories specifically tested for use with the vehicle’s head restraint/headrest stalk. Do not remove the head restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat if the head restraint/headrest has been removed. If the head restraint/headrest was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints/headrests. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. LRS2403 The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with head restraints/headrests. 䉱 Indicates the seating position equipped with a head restraint. is 䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped with a headrest. + Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable). ∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head restraint/headrest that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable. 1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrests have multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock them in a desired adjustment position. ∙ The non-adjustable head restraints/ headrests have a single locking notch to secure them to the seat frame. ∙ Proper Adjustment: – For the adjustable type, align the head restraint/headrest so the center of your ear is approximately level with the center of the head restraint/headrest. – If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position. ∙ If the head restraint/headrest has been removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and locked in place before riding in that designated seating position. LRS2300 ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/ HEADREST COMPONENTS 1. Removable head restraint/headrest LRS2299 NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/HEADREST COMPONENTS 2. Multiple notches 1. Removable head restraint/headrest 3. Lock knob 2. Single notch 4. Stalks 3. Lock knob 4. Stalks Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9 5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position. LRS2302 REMOVE Use the following procedure to remove the head restraint/headrest: 1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the highest position. 2. Push and hold the lock knob. 3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from the seat. 4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle. 1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2303 INSTALL 1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with the holes in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint/headrest is facing the correct direction. The stalk 1 must be with the notch (notches) 䊊 installed in the hole with the lock knob 2 . 䊊 2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down. 3. Properly adjust the head restraint/ headrest before an occupant uses the seating position. WRS0134 ADJUST For adjustable head restraint/headrest Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center is level with the center of your ears. If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position. LRS2351 For non-adjustable headrest head restraint/ Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position. LRS2305 Raise To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up. Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11 SEAT BELTS LRS2306 Lower To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down. Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position. SSS0136 PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag. 1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven. SSS0134 WARNING ∙ Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be in the rear seats and in an appropriate restraint. SSS0016 WARNING ∙ The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13 ∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle. ∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness. ∙ Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt. ∙ Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts. SSS0014 WARNING ∙ Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never put the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. ∙ Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident. ∙ If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is placed in the ON position with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ No changes should be made to the seat belt system. For example, do not modify the seat belt, add material, or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system. Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury. 1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have activated, they cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. ∙ All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged. For additional information, refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. PREGNANT WOMEN LRS0786 NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations. SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT INJURED PERSONS Both the driver’s and passenger’s front seats are equipped with a seat belt warning light. The warning light, located on the instrument panel, will show the status of the driver and passenger seat belt. NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations. NOTE: The front passenger seat belt warning light will not light up if the seat is not occupied. THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR WARNING ∙ Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be in the rear seats and in an appropriate restraint. ∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. ∙ For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15 ∙ Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child’s neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt. LRS2160 Manual front seat shown (if so equipped) Fastening the seat belts 1. Adjust the seat. For additional information, refer to “Seats” in this section. 1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2662 Power front seat shown (if so equipped) LRS2674 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the A until you hear and feel the buckle 䊊 latch engage. ∙ The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat. ∙ If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17 The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts. The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation. LRS2675 3. Position the lap belt portion low and B as shown. snug on the hips 䊊 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward C . the retractor to take up extra slack 䊊 Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest. The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions’ three-point seat belts have two modes of operation: ∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section. The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode should not be activated. If it is activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension. It can also change the operation of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section. 1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WARNING When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop. To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows: ∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement. If the retractor does not lock during this check, get the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service or to learn more about seat belt operation. WRS0139 Unfastening the seat belts To unfasten the seat belt, press the button 1 . The seat belt automation the buckle 䊊 cally retracts. Checking seat belt operation Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods: ∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor ∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly LRS0242 Shoulder belt height adjustment (front seats) The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. To 1 adjust, pull out the adjustment button 䊊 and move the shoulder belt anchor to the 2 , so the belt passes over desired position 䊊 the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19 SEAT BELT EXTENDERS WARNING If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available for purchase. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for assistance with purchasing an extender if an extender is required. ∙ After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position. ∙ The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. LRS2851 Seat belt hook When the seat belt is not in use and when folding down the rear seats, hook the rear seat belts on the seat belt hooks as shown. Perform a visual check to ensure the seat belt is not obstructing the rear seatback latch prior to folding up the rear seat. WARNING Before folding up the rear seats, ensure the seat belts are not obstructing the rear seatback latches to avoid damage to the seat belt webbing. 1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WARNING ∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, should be used with NISSAN seat belts. ∙ Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident. CHILD SAFETY ∙ Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision or a sudden stop. SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE ∙ To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry. ∙ If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. ∙ Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components, such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced. WARNING Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child’s neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt. Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained. In addition to the general information in this manual, child safety information is available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child. There are three basic types of child restraint systems: ∙ Rear-facing child restraints ∙ Forward-facing child restraints ∙ Booster seats The proper restraint depends on the child’s size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing child restraints. Forwardfacing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward-facing child restraint. WARNING Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21 All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section. Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat belt. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section. SMALL CHILDREN NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and children be restrained in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the front passenger. For additional information, refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in this section. INFANTS Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing child restraint as long as possible up to the height or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear-facing child restraint and are at least 1 year old should be secured in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recommends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or 1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LARGER CHILDREN Children should remain in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness until they reach the maximum height or weight limit allowed by the child restraint manufacturer. Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit of the harness-equipped forwardfacing child restraint, NISSAN recommends that the child be placed in a commercially available booster seat to obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the chest and the top, middle portion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross the neck or face and should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly across the lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. A booster seat should be used until the child can pass the seat belt fit test below: ∙ Are the child’s back and hips against the vehicle seatback? NOTE: Laws in some communities may follow different guidelines. Check local and state regulations to confirm your child is using the correct restraint system before traveling. ∙ Is the child able to sit without slouching? ∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily over the front edge of the seat with feet flat on the floor? WARNING ∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap belt low and snug across the hips and shoulder belt across mid-chest and shoulder)? ∙ Is the child able to use the properly adjusted head restraint/headrest? ∙ Will the child be able to stay in position for the entire ride? Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area. The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision. LRS2690 If you answered no to any of these questions, the child should remain in a booster seat using a three-point type seat belt. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23 CHILD RESTRAINTS – NISSAN recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If you must install a forwardfacing child restraint in the front seat, refer to “Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts” in this section. ARS1098 PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS WARNING ∙ Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision: WRS0256 – The child restraint must be used and installed properly. Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. – Infants and children should never be held on anyone’s lap. Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision. – Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger. 1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system – Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rearfacing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat. – Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle. Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle. – Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. – Never use the anchor points for adult seat belts, or other items. – A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat. – Keep seatbacks as upright as possible after fitting the child restraint. – Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the vehicle. ∙ When the child restraint is not in use, keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants or damage the vehicle. CAUTION A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint. This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these anchors. For additional information, refer to “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system” in this section. If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used. Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind: ∙ Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. ∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system. ∙ If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child’s height and weight. Always follow all recommended procedures. ∙ If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is less than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH anchors or the seat belt to install the child restraint (not both at the same time). ∙ If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25 ∙ Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation. hicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation. All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forwardfacing child restraints be secured to the designated anchor point on the vehicle. The LATCH lower anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the following positions only: ∙ Rear bench seat – outboard seating positions LATCH lower anchor WARNING LRS3222 LATCH system lower anchor locations bench seat LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH system compatible child restraints. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint unless the combined weight of the child and child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the ve- 1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision: – Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration. – Do not secure a child restraint in the rear bench center position using the LATCH system anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly. – Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area. Feel to make sure there are no obstructions over the anchors such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the lower anchors are obstructed. – Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorages, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. LRS3036 LATCH lower anchor location LRS2977 LATCH label locations rear bench LATCH lower anchor location The LATCH lower anchors are located as shown. A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH lower anchors. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27 Top tether anchor WARNING ∙ Do not allow cargo to contact the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor. Properly secure the cargo so it does not contact the top tether strap. Cargo that is not properly secured or cargo that contacts the top tether strap may damage it during a collision. A child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged. LRS0661 LATCH webbing-mounted attachment Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer. LRS0662 LATCH rigid-mounted attachment When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint. 1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ∙ Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorages, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. The top tether anchor located in the roof is only to be used for a child restraint located in the center position of the rear bench seat. If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint in the rear bench seats using the LATCH system: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH LRS2714 1 䊊 2 䊊 Rear bench seat Top tether strap Anchor point Top tether anchor point locations Anchor points are located in the following locations: ∙ Rear bench on the bottom of the seatback in the seating positions shown. For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint. Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation. ∙ Roof above the rear cargo area. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29 LRS2997 Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2 LRS2996 Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2 2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors. 1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0673 Rear-facing – step 3 3. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments. the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. 5. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2 through 4. REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation. Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats: WARNING LRS0674 Rear-facing – step 4 4. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31 WRS0256 Rear-facing – step 1 1. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. WRS0761 Rear-facing – step 2 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing. 1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2395 Rear-facing – step 3 3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted. LRS2396 Rear-facing – step 4 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. WRS0762 Rear-facing – step 5 5. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt. LRS2397 Rear-facing – step 6 6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint in the rear bench seats using the LATCH system: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint. Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation. 1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2995 Forward-facing webbing-mounted step 2 – Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor. 3. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback. LRS2994 Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2 2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether strap” in this section. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this section. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint. LRS0671 Forward-facing – step 4 4. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments. 5. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35 7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2 through 6. WRS0697 Forward-facing – step 6 6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. 1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS3041 1 䊊 2 䊊 Rear seats Top tether strap Anchor point Installing top tether strap The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchor attachments. First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard positions only). Rear bench seat WARNING OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS 1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this section. 2. Position the top tether strap shown. 1 䊊 as 3. Secure the tether strap to the tether 2 as shown. anchor point 䊊 4. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack. Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS WARNING The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section. If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37 Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat: 1. If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and, therefore, must not be used in the front seat. WRS0699 Forward-facing (front passenger seat) – step 1 For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint. Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation. 2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this section. 1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint. Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor. WRS0680 Forward-facing – step 3 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing. LRS2394 Forward-facing – step 4 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether strap” in this section. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39 LRS0668 Forward-facing – step 5 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. WRS0681 Forward-facing – step 6 6. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt. 7. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack. 1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0698 Forward-facing – step 8 8. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. 9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2 through 8. WRS0475 Forward-facing – step 10 10. If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light should illuminate. If this light is not illuminated refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section. Move the child restraint to another seating position. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. LRS2714 1 䊊 2 䊊 Rear seats Top tether strap Anchor point Installing top tether strap The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with seat belts. First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41 Rear bench seat OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS 1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this section. 2. Position the top tether strap shown. 1 䊊 as 3. Secure the tether strap to the tether 2 as shown. anchor point 䊊 4. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack. CENTER SEATING POSITION 1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this section. 4. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack. Make sure the head restraint/headrest does not contact the top tether strap. If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. WARNING Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. 2 cover 2. Open the top tether anchor 䊊 located on the ceiling. 1 to the tether 3. Secure the tether strap 䊊 2 as shown. anchor point 䊊 1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system BOOSTER SEATS For additional information on installing a booster seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions outlined in this section. Precautions on booster seats WARNING If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly, the risk of a child being injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases: – Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child’s face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach. – Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the child’s arm. – A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap/shoulder belt. LRS2479 A. Low back booster seat B. High back booster seat LRS0453 LRS0464 Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind: ∙ Make sure the child’s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at or above the center of the child’s ears. For example, if a low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is lower than the center of the child’s ears, a high back booster seat should be used. ∙ Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. ∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43 ∙ If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place the child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child. Always follow all recommended procedures. Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat: All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat. Booster seat installation WARNING To avoid injury to child, do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts. For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety,” “Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint. 1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0699 1. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position. 2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a front-facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions. LRS0454 Front passenger position LRS0452 Rear outboard position LRS0451 Rear center position 3. The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the booster seat is removed. For additional information, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this section. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) PRECAUTIONS ON SRS If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat. This SRS section contains important information concerning the following systems: ∙ Driver and front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System) 4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing. 5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing. 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in “Three-point type seat belt with retractor” in this section. ∙ Front seat-mounted supplemental air bag side-impact ∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag WRS0475 7. If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front pasmay or senger air bag status light may not illuminate, depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat being used. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section. ∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats) Supplemental front-impact air bag system The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. 1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the curtain air bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short time. The SRS is designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in this section. The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. WRS0031 WARNING ∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents ∙ The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47 ∙ The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always properly use the seat belts. ∙ The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section. ∙ Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates. ∙ The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage, then inflates the air bags as needed. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. 1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ARS1133 ARS1041 WARNING ∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49 ARS1042 WARNING ∙ Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Pre-teens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible. 1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ARS1043 ARS1044 ARS1045 ARS1046 WRS0431 ∙ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roofmounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags: WARNING WARNING ∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51 WARNING LRS3119 ∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations. WRS0032 WARNING ∙ When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. ∙ Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bag inflation. 1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0162 SSS0159 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53 NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (front seats) 1. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules 2. Air bag Control Unit (ACU) 3. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) 4. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag modules 5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags 6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag inflators 7. Satellite sensors (driver’s side shown, passengers side similar) 8. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats) 9. Pressure sensors in door (driver’s side shown; front passenger side similar) 10. Crash zone sensor LRS2817 1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WARNING To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, please observe the following items. ∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear bench seats to push or pull on the seatback pocket. ∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint/headrest or in the seatback pocket. ∙ Make sure that there is nothing pressing against the rear of the seatback, such as a child restraint installed in the rear seat or an object stored on the floor. ∙ Make sure that there is no object placed under the front passenger seat. ∙ Make sure that there is no object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door. ∙ If a forward-facing child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, do not position the front passenger seat so the child restraint contacts the instrument panel. If the child restraint does contact the instrument panel, the system may determine the seat is occupied and the passenger air bag may deploy in a collision. Also the front passenger air bag status light may not illuminate. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section. ∙ Confirm the operating condition with the front passenger air bag status light. ∙ If you notice that the front passenger air bag status light is not operating as described in this section, get the occupant classification system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ Until you have confirmed with a dealer that your passenger seat occupant classification system is working properly, position the occupants in the rear seating positions. ∙ Do not position the front passenger seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the front seat does contact the rear seat, the air bag system may determine a sensor malfunction has occurred and the front passenger air bag status light may illuminate and the supplemental air bag warning light may flash. This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed. The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag system operation. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55 The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors and occupation classification sensor (weight sensor). Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the occupant classification sensor is also monitored. Based on information from the sensor, only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag may be automatically turned off under some conditions, depending on the weight detected on the front passenger seat and how the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the front passenger air bag status light will be illuminated. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section. One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system. If you have any questions about your air bag system, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information about the system. If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner’s Manual. When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. 1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and front passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the front air bag module during inflation. The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision. The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position. After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. Front passenger air bag and status light WARNING WRS0475 The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to learn how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt and child restraints is necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. CONDITION DESCRIPTION Empty Empty front passenger seat Bag or Child or Child Restraint or Small Adult in front passenger seat Adult in the front passenger seat Nobody/Somebody Adult In addition to the above, certain objects placed on the front passenger seat may also cause the light to operate as described above depending on their weight. PASSENGER AIR BAG ) STATUS LIGHT ( ON (illuminated) Status light The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag on or off depending on the weight applied to the front passenger seat. The status of the front passenger air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air which is located on bag status light the instrument panel. After the ignition switch is placed in the "ON" position, the front passenger air bag status light on the instrument panel illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off or remains illuminated depending on the front passenger seat occupied status. The light operates as follows: FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS INHIBITED ON (illuminated) INHIBITED OFF (dark) ACTIVATED For additional information, refer to “Normal operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this section. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57 Front passenger air bag The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system. The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements. The occupant classification sensor in this vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat by weight. For example, if a child is in the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the front passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, its weight and the child’s weight can be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF. Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the front passenger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cushion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag. additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section. NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear seat. NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant classification sensor is designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations. Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or move in a collision or sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. For Using the front passenger air bag status light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is automatically turned OFF. 1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the front passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation, because of the object’s weight detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is standing on the seat, or if two children are on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual. Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly. If an adult occupant is in the seat but the front passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly or not using the seat belt properly. If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, the front passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used. If the air bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly, the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air bag status light is still not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat. If the front passenger air bag status light will not illuminate even though you believe that the child restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned, it is recommended that you take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can check system status by using a special tool. However, until you have confirmed with a dealer that your air bag is working properly, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and front passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the front passenger seat status. This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction. If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system, the supplemental air , located in the mebag warning light ter and gauges area of the instrument panel, will be illuminated (blinking or steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Normal operation In order for the occupant classification sensor system to classify the front passenger based on weight, please follow the precautions and steps outlined below: Precautions ∙ Make sure that there are no objects weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket. ∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other object is not pressing against the rear of the seatback. ∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat. ∙ Make sure that the front passenger seat or seatback is not forced back against an object on the seat or floor behind it. ∙ Make sure that there is no object placed under the front passenger seat. Steps 1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats” section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with your feet comfortably extended to the floor. 2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap. 3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the “Seat belts” section of this manual. Front passenger seat belt buckle status is monitored by the occupant classification system, and is used as an input to determine occupancy status. So, it is highly recommended that the front passenger fasten their seat belt. 4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds allowing the system to classify the front passenger before the vehicle is put into motion. 5. Ensure proper classification by checking the front passenger air bag status light. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59 NOTE: This vehicle’s occupant classification sensor system generally keeps the classification locked during driving, so it is important that you confirm that the front passenger is properly classified prior to driving. However, the occupant classification sensor may recalculate the weight of the occupant under some conditions (both while driving and when stopped), so front passenger seat occupants should continue to remain seated as outlined above. Troubleshooting If you think the front passenger air bag status light is incorrect: 1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the front passenger seat: ∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag light is functioning as intended. The front passenger air bag is suppressed. However, if the occupant is not a small adult, then this may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors: ∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor. ∙ A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback. ∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat. ∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor behind it. ∙ An object placed under the front passenger seat. ∙ An object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door. If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute. If the light is still ON after this, the person should be advised not to ride in the front passenger seat and the vehicle should be checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. 2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child or child restraint occupying the front passenger seat. This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors: ∙ Small adult or child is not sitting upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor. ∙ The child restraint is not properly installed, as outlined in the “Child restraints” section of this manual. NOTE: ∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket. A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially. ∙ A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback. 1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat. ∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor behind it. ∙ An object placed under the front passenger seat. ∙ An object placed between the seat cushion and center console. If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute. NOTE: A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially. If the light is still OFF after this, the small adult, child or child restraint should be repositioned in the rear seat and the vehicle should be checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. Other supplemental front-impact air bag precautions WARNING ∙ Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate. ∙ Immediately after inflation, several front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. ∙ Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system. ∙ Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system. ∙ Removing or modifying the front passenger seat may affect the function of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury. ∙ No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system. 3. If the light is OFF with no front passenger and no objects on the front passenger seat, the vehicle should be Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61 ∙ Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, on the seat that are not specifically designed to assure proper air bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensor (weight sensor). ∙ No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system. This may affect the front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury. ∙ It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the front air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system. ∙ A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system. *The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual. 1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2501 Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain sideimpact and rollover supplemental air bag systems The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags are located in the side roof rails in both rows. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual apply and must be followed. The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in an- other type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity impact. They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions. Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for example, during severe offroading) may cause the curtain air bags to inflate. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation. When the side air bags and curtain air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest of the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions in all rows. They can help save lives and reduce serious in- juries. However, an inflating side air bag or curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. mental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and front passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bags and curtain air bags inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over. ∙ Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag inflates. The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a short time. The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supple- WARNING ∙ Right after inflation, several side air bag and curtain air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. ∙ No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems. ∙ Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the curtain air bag systems. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63 ∙ Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material near the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag. ∙ It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the side air bag and curtain air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or curtain air bag systems. *The SRS wiring harness or connectors are yellow or orange for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bags and curtain air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats) WARNING ∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused after activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit. ∙ It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the pretensioner system. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system. ∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision but pretensioner(s) are not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ If you need to dispose of the pretensioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury. ∙ No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury. The pretensioner system may activate with the supplemental air bag system in certain types of collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants. 1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system The pretensioner(s) are encased within the seat belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor affixed to the floor of the vehicle. These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts. When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest. The supplemental air bag warning is used to indicate malfunctions light in the pretensioner system. For additional information, refer to "Supplemental air bag warning light" in this section. If the operation of the supplemental air bag warning light indicates there is a malfunction, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual. WARNING Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may cause serious injury or death. WRS0885 1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels The warning labels are located on the surface of the sun visor. SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS Warning labels about the supplemental front-impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65 If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing: ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds. ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently. ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. LRS0100 SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits for the air bag systems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational. Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly. They must be checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. 1-66 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Repair and replacement procedure The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred. These systems should be repaired and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance. The ignition switch should always be placed in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle. WARNING ∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, or curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, the activated pretensioner(s) must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner(s) should be replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. However, the air bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot be repaired. ∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle from any direction, your Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) should be checked to verify it is still functioning correctly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The OCS should be checked even if no air bags deploy as a result of the impact. Failure to verify proper OCS function may result in an improper air bag deployment resulting in injury or death. ∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be inspected if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ If you need to dispose of the supplemental air bag or pretensioner systems or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67 2 Instruments and controls Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Distance To Empty (DTE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Compass (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11 Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Vehicle information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 How to use the vehicle information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Resetting the drive computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Vehicle information display warnings and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 2-44 Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Rear switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Instrument brightness control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55 Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-55 Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . . 2-56 Dynamic driver assistance switch (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 Steering Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch. . . . . . 2-58 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Rear Door Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 E-call (SOS) button (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 12v outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 Front-door pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 Overhead sunglasses storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 Divide-N-Hide® adjustable floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 Luggage hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68 Cargo cover (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68 Roof rack (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71 Power moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 Personal lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 Room light (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 Luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers and gate openers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81 Operating the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81 Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81 Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . 2-82 Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82 If your vehicle is stolen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82 INSTRUMENT PANEL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. LII2516 2-2 Instruments and controls Vent (P. 4-28) Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn signal switch (P. 2-48) Meters and gauges (P. 2-4) Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-11) Vehicle information display (P. 2-21) Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-45) Rear wiper washer switch (P. 2-45) Ignition switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-14) Push-button ignition switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-15) Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2) Radio* Navigation system (if so equipped)* Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-46) Glove box (P. 2-63) Heater and air conditioning controls (P. 4-29, 4-37) Power outlet (P. 2-60) Shift lever (P. 5-24) Auxiliary jack* USB port* 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. Front passenger air bag status light (P. 1-46) Cruise control switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-65) Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-67) Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System* ProPILOT Assist switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-91) Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-46) Horn (P. 2-55) Tilt and telescopic steering (P. 3-36) Control panel and vehicle information display switches (P. 2-21) Hood release (P. 3-25) Fuel door release (P. 3-33) SPORT mode switch (P. 5-34) ECO mode switch (P. 5-34) Liftgate instrument panel switch (P. 3-26) All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-58) Steering Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped) (P. 2-57) 21. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (P. 2-58) Dynamic driver assistance switch (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped) (P. 2-57) Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-56) Instrument brightness control (P. 2-48) Twin trip odometer reset switch (P. 2-5) *: Refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual. Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. Instruments and controls 2-3 METERS AND GAUGES LIC2255 Speedometer The speedometer indicates vehicle speed. LIC2627 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Tachometer Warning and indicator lights Vehicle information display Speedometer Fuel gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge 2-4 Instruments and controls SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and odometer. The speedometer is located on the right side of the meter cluster. The odometer is located within the vehicle information display. Changing the display 2 on the left Push the TRIP RESET switch 䊊 side of the instrument panel to change the display as follows: ODO → Trip → Trip → ODO Resetting the trip odometer 2 until the Push the TRIP RESET switch 䊊 desired trip odometer (Trip or Trip ) is displayed. LIC3693 Odometer/Twin trip odometer The odometer and the twin trip odometer 1 are displayed in the vehicle information 䊊 display when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips. 2 for Push and hold the TRIP RESET switch 䊊 more than 1 second to reset the currently displayed trip odometer to zero. LIC4258 Clock and outside temperature display Clock The clock is displayed at the top of the vehicle information display. Outside temperature display The outside temperature is displayed at the top of the vehicle information display. The snowflake icon appears if the outside temperature is below 37°F (3°C). The temperature can be changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit. For additional information, refer to “Unit” in this section. Instruments and controls 2-5 CAUTION If the gauge indicates coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If the gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. For additional information, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual for immediate action required. LIC2219 TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev 1 . engine into the red zone 䊊 CAUTION When engine speed approaches the red zone, reduce engine speed. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage. 2-6 Instruments and controls LIC2220 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant tempera1 when ture is within the normal range 䊊 the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration. The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions. Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers 0 (Empty). indicates that the fuel-filler door The is located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. CAUTION LIC2222 FUEL GAUGE The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank. The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills. The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. The low fuel warning message appears in the vehicle information display when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low. ∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. light After a few driving trips. the should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ For additional information, refer to “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in this section. DISTANCE TO EMPTY (DTE) Displays the estimated distance the vehicle can be driven before refueling. The value is calculated based on recent fuel economy, the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank, and the actual fuel consumption. Changes in driving patterns or conditions can cause the DTE value to vary. As a result, the value displayed may differ from the actual distance that can be driven. DTE display will change to “---” when the fuel level in the tank is getting low, prior to the fuel gauge reaching 0 (Empty). NOTE: ∙ The DTE value after refill is estimated based on recent fuel economy and amount of fuel added. ∙ If a small amount of fuel is added, or the ignition is on during refueling, the display may not be updated. ∙ Conditions that affect the fuel economy will also affect the estimated DTE value (city/highway driving, idle time, remote start time, terrain, seasonal weather, added vehicle weight, added deflectors, roof racks, etc.). Instruments and controls 2-7 COMPASS (if so equipped) This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and indicates the heading direction of the vehicle. You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route. The compass will be calibrated once it has tracked three complete circles. With the ignition switch in the ON position, button as described in the press the charts below to activate various features of the automatic anti-glare rearview mirror. Press and hold the button for about: 1 second 8 seconds 10 seconds Feature: (Press button again for about 1 second to change settings) Compass display toggles on/off Compass zone can be changed to correct false compass readings Compass enters calibration mode For additional information about the automatic anti-glare feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual. LIC1487 COMPASS DISPLAY Press the button for about one second when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position to toggle the compass di1 on or off. The display will rection display 䊊 indicate the direction that the vehicle is heading. N: North E: East S: South W: West If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h). 2-8 Instruments and controls Zone variation change procedure The difference between magnetic north and geographical north is known as variance. In some areas, this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings. Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens: button for 1. Press and hold the about 8 seconds. The current zone number will appear in the display. Release the button. 2. Find your current location on the zone map. Refer to the illustration. button repeatedly to 3. Press the toggle through the zone numbers until the desired number appears in the display. Once you have selected a zone number, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds. Inaccurate compass direction The compass display is equipped with automatic correction function. If the correct direction is not shown, follow this procedure. WIC0355 Instruments and controls 2-9 1. With the display turned on, press and hold the for about 10 seconds. The “C” icon in the compass display will illuminate. 2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h). 3. After completing the circles, the display should return to normal. CAUTION ∙ Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc., which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet. They affect the operation of the compass. ∙ When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as it may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing. 2-10 Instruments and controls WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system warning light (if so equipped) High Beam Assist indicator light (green) (if so equipped) Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system warning light (if so equipped) Seat belt warning light and chime High beam indicator light (blue) Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (if so equipped) Supplemental air bag warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) or All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK indicator light (if so equipped) Security indicator light or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light Brake warning light (red) Charge warning light Automatic brake hold indicator light (green) (if so equipped) or Automatic brake hold indicator light (white) (if so equipped) Electronic parking brake warning light (yellow) (if so equipped) Low tire pressure warning light or Electronic parking brake indicator light (red) (if so equipped) Master warning light Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped) Power steering warning light Front passenger air bag status light Side light and headlight indicator light (green) Slip indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light Instruments and controls 2-11 CHECKING LIGHTS WARNING LIGHTS With all doors closed, apply the parking brake, fasten the seat belts and place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights (if so equipped) will come on: For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section. PARKor (red), , , , The following lights (if so equipped) come on briefly and then go off: or (red), or , , , , , If any light fails to come on or operate in a way other than described, it may indicate a burned-out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Some indicators and warnings are also displayed on the vehicle information display between the speedometer and tachometer. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section. or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the ABS warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational. If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates normally but without antilock assistance. For additional information, refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system warning light (if so equipped) This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started. This light illuminates when the AEB system is set to OFF on the vehicle information display. If the light illuminates when the AEB system is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, refer to “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (if so equipped) This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started. 2-12 Instruments and controls fThis light illuminates when the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is set to OFF in the vehicle information display. If the light illuminates when the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, refer to “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. or Brake warning light (red) This light functions for the foot brake system. Low brake fluid warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following: 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. For additional information, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Doit-yourself ” section of this manual. 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. WARNING ∙ Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous. ∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel. ∙ If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Charge warning light If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, or missing, or if the light remains on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. CAUTION ∙ Do not ground electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. For additional information, refer to “Variable voltage control system” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual. ∙ Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose, broken or missing. or Electronic parking brake warning light (yellow) (if so equipped) The electronic parking brake system warning light functions for the electronic parking brake system. If the warning light illuminates, it may indicate the electronic parking brake system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Instruments and controls 2-13 For additional information, refer to “Parking brake” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Low tire pressure warning light Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare. The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly. After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off. Low tire pressure warning If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the warning light will illuminate. A “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning also appears in the vehicle information display. When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver’s door opening. 2-14 Instruments and controls The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section and in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. TPMS malfunction If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The "Tire Pressure Low — Add Air" warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction. For additional information, refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual. WARNING ∙ Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use. ∙ If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch placed in the ON position, have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ If the light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury or death. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver’s door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services. ∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. CAUTION Master warning light When the ignition is in the ON position, the master warning light illuminates if any of the following are displayed on the vehicle information display. ∙ All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Tire Size Incorrect See Owner’s Manual ∙ All-Wheel Drive (AWD) High Temp. Stop vehicle ∙ All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Error See Owner’s Manual ∙ No key warning ∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly. ∙ Low fuel warning ∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the TPMS may not operate correctly. ∙ Parking brake release warning ∙ Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the four wheels correctly. ∙ Low windshield-washer fluid warning ∙ Door/liftgate open warning ∙ Loose fuel cap warning If the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system malfunctions, or the diameter of the front and the rear wheels are different, the master warning light will illuminate. For additional information, refer to “All-Wheel Drive (AWD)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Instruments and controls 2-15 ∙ If the warning light comes on while driving there may be a malfunction in the AWD system. Reduce the vehicle speed and have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. CAUTION ∙ If the master warning light was illuminated while driving: —AWD High Temp Stop vehicle Pull off the road in a safe area and idle the engine. The driving mode will change to 2WD to prevent the AWD system from malfunctioning. If the warning light turns off, you can drive again. —Tire Size Manual Incorrect See Owner’s Pull off the road in a safe area and idle the engine. Check that all tire sizes are the same, tire pressure is correct and tires are not worn. ∙ If the warning light is still on after the above operations, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. 2-16 Instruments and controls Power steering warning light WARNING ∙ If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate. ∙ When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering. You will still have control of the vehicle, but the steering will be harder to operate. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the power steering warning light illuminates. After starting the engine, the power steering warning light turns off. This indicates the power steering is operational. If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the power steering checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering, but you will still have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steering effort is required to operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds. For additional information, refer to “Power steering” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system warning light (if so equipped) This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started. This light illuminates when the RAB system is turned off in the vehicle information display. If the light illuminates when the RAB system is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, refer to “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Seat belt warning light and chime The light and chime remind you to fasten your seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position and remains illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is securely fastened. The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened when the front passenger’s seat is occupied. For 7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the system does not activate the warning light for the front passenger. For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual. Supplemental air bag warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and pretensioner seat belt systems need servicing: ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds. ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently. ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services. Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pretensioner(s) may not function properly. For additional information, refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual. WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. INDICATOR LIGHTS For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK indicator light (if so equipped) When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK indicator light illuminates and then turns off. When selecting AWD LOCK mode while the engine is running, the AWD LOCK indicator light illuminates. CAUTION Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in the LOCK mode. Instruments and controls 2-17 Automatic brake hold indicator light (green) (if so equipped) The automatic brake hold indicator light (green) illuminates while the automatic brake hold system is operating. For additional information, refer to “Automatic brake hold” in the “Starting and driving” section of the Owner’s Manual. Automatic brake hold indicator light (white) (if so equipped) The automatic brake hold indicator (white) illuminates when the automatic brake hold system is on standby. For additional information, refer to “Automatic brake hold” in the “Starting and driving” section of the Owner’s Manual. or Electronic parking brake indicator light (red) (if so equipped) This light illuminates when the electronic parking brake system is operating. 2-18 Instruments and controls When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the electronic parking brake warning light illuminates. When the engine is started and the parking brake is released, the warning light turns off. If the parking brake is not released, the electronic parking brake warning light remains illuminated. Ensure the electronic parking brake warning light has turned off before driving. If the electronic parking brake warning light illuminates or flashes while the electronic parking brake system warning light (yellow) illuminates, it may indicate that the electronic parking brake system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to “Parking brake” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped) The front fog light indicator light illuminates when the front fog lights are on. For additional information, refer to “Fog light switch” in this section. Front passenger air bag status light The front passenger air bag status light will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be off depending on how the front passenger seat is being used. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual. High Beam Assist indicator light (green) (if so equipped) This indicator light illuminates when the headlights come on while the headlight switch is in the AUTO position with the high beams selected. This indicates that the high beam assist is operational. For additional information, refer to “Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section. High beam indicator light (blue) This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected. The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction. The MIL may also come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. light After a few driving trips, the should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists. If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control system inspection/maintenance test. For additional information, refer to “Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. Operation The MIL will come on in one of two ways: ∙ MIL on steady — An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the vehicle information display. If the fuelfiller cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the light should turn off vehicle. The light after a few driving trips. If the does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer. – if possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed. The MIL may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer. CAUTION Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system. Security indicator light ∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage: This light blinks when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position. – do not drive at speeds above 45 mph (72 km/h). For additional information, refer to “Security systems” in this section. The blinking security indicator light indicates that the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational. – avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. – avoid steep uphill grades. Instruments and controls 2-19 Side light and headlight indicator light (green) The side light and headlight indicator light illuminates when the side light or headlight position is selected. For additional information, refer to “Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section. Slip indicator light This indicator light will blink when the VDC system is operating, thus alerting the driver to the fact that the road surface is slippery and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits. You may feel or hear the system working; this is normal. The light will blink for a few seconds after the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin. indicator light also comes on The when you place the ignition switch in the ON position. The light will turn off after approximately 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light does not come on have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. 2-20 Instruments and controls Turn signal/hazard indicator lights The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated. Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light This indicator light comes on when the VDC OFF switch is pushed to off. This indicates the VDC system has been turned off. Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. The VDC OFF indicator light also comes on when you place the ignition switch in the ON position. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light stays on or comes on indicator light while along with the you are driving, have the VDC system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. While the VDC system is operating, you might feel a slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this is normal. AUDIBLE REMINDERS Brake pad wear warning The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard. Key reminder chime A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position or placed in the OFF or LOCK position with the key left in the vehicle. Make sure the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK position, and take the key with you when leaving the vehicle. VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY Light reminder chime Driving aid chimes (if so equipped) With the ignition switch placed in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on. An audible alert/chime may be heard if any of the following systems are active: Turn the headlight control switch off before leaving the vehicle. NISSAN Intelligent Key® door buzzer (if so equipped) The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any one of the following improper operations is found. ∙ The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when locking the doors. ∙ Any doors are not closed securely when locking the doors. When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual. ∙ Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) ∙ Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection ∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) ∙ Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) ∙ Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) ∙ Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ∙ ProPILOT Assist ∙ Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) ∙ Rear Sonar System (RSS) For additional information, refer to the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. LIC2630 The vehicle information display is located to the left of the speedometer. It displays such items as: ∙ Vehicle settings ∙ Drive computer information ∙ Drive system warnings and settings ∙ Cruise control system information ∙ NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation information ∙ Chassis Control ∙ Indicators and warnings ∙ Tire Pressure information Instruments and controls 2-21 3 䊊 LIC3566 HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY The vehicle information display can be changed using the , , and OK buttons located on the steering wheel. 1 䊊 2 䊊 - Use these buttons to navigate the vehicle information display. OK - Change or select an item in the vehicle information display. 2-22 Instruments and controls — Returns to the previous menu. and buttons also The OK, control audio and control panel functions in some conditions. Most screens and menus offer instruction prompts of the steering switch buttons to indicate how to control the vehicle information display. An arrow on the bottom right side of the vehicle information display will appear if there is more than one page of menu items. The OK button changes the audio source and buttons also control voice the recognition manual mode. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual. STARTUP DISPLAY When the vehicle is placed in the ON position, the vehicle information display may display the following screens: ∙ Home ∙ Drive Computer — Average Speed-Trip (Distance & Time)-Fuel Economy ∙ Compass or Navigation (if so equipped) ∙ Audio ∙ Intelligent Cruise or ProPILOT (if so equipped) ∙ Driving Aids ∙ Tire Pressures ∙ 4x4–i ∙ Chassis Control ∙ Warnings ∙ Settings Warnings will only display if there are any present. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display warnings and indicators” in this section. To control which items display in the vehicle information display, refer to “Meter settings” in this section. RESETTING THE DRIVE COMPUTER 1. Press the or buttons until you reach the desired drive computer mode. NOTE: Once you have a drive computer disand played, you can use the buttons to switch between Drive Com1 or 䊊 2 . puter 䊊 2. Press the OK button. 3. Select one of the following items: ∙ “Cancel” — returns to the previous screen without resetting the trip computer. ∙ Drive computer value – “Average Speed” - resets the average speed of the selected drive computer. SETTINGS The setting mode allows you to change the information displayed in the vehicle information display: – “Distance” - resets the distance and time of the selected drive computer. ∙ Driver Assistance – “Fuel Economy” - resets the fuel economy of the selected drive computer. ∙ Meter Settings ∙ “All” — resets all linked values for the selected drive computer. This includes distance and time, average fuel economy and average speed information for the selected drive computer. ∙ Clock ∙ Vehicle Settings ∙ Maintenance ∙ Alarm ∙ Tire Pressures ∙ Unit NOTE: ∙ Language Drive computer 2 will automatically reset each time the ignition is placed in the OFF position. ∙ Factory Reset Instruments and controls 2-23 Driver Assistance The driver assistance menu allows the user to change the settings for driving, parking, and braking aids. Menu item Driving Aids Steering Assist (if so equipped) Emergency Brake Front Rear (if so equipped) Lane (if so equipped) Warning (LDW) Prevention (LDP) Blind Spot Warning (BSW) Parking Aids Moving Object (if so equipped) Cross Traffic Rear Sensor (if so equipped) Display (if so equipped) 2-24 Instruments and controls Result Displays available driving aids. Allows user to turn the steering assist on or off. Displays available emergency braking options. Allows user to turn the front emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)” and “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection” in the “Starting and driving” section of your owner’s manual. Allows user to turn the rear emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Rear Emergency Braking (RAB)” in the “Starting and driving” section of your owner’s manual. Displays available lane options. Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) systems on or off. For additional information, refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” and “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Allows user to turn the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Displays available blind spot options. Allows user to turn Blind Spot Warning (BSW) on or off. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” in the “Starting and driving” section of your owner’s manual. Displays available parking aids. Allows user to turn the Moving Object Detection (MOD) feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Around View Monitor” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of your owner’s manual. Allows user to turn the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of your owner’s manual. Allows user to turn the rear sensor on or off. Allows user to turn the display on or off. Menu item Volume (if so equipped) Range (if so equipped) Chassis Control Trace Control Engine Brake Result Allows user to select sensor volume (High, Med. or Low). Allows user to select the sensor range (Far, Mid. or Near). Displays available chassis controls options. Allows user to turn the trace control feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Allows user to turn the engine brake feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Engine Brake (I-EB)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Clock Menu item Clock Result Allows user to adjust the clock settings and time within the vehicle information display. Adjustments that can be made include automatically setting the time, 12H/24H format, Daylight Saving Time, time zone, and manually setting the time. The clock may also be set within the center display. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual. Instruments and controls 2-25 Meter Settings The meter settings allow the user to change the settings for the vehicle information display. Menu item Main Menu Selection Home Average Speed Trip Fuel Economy Navigation (if so equipped) Audio CRUISE (if so equipped) Driving Aids Tire Pressures 4x4–i (if so equipped) Chassis Control Body Color ECO Mode Settings ECO Indicator DISP Mode Pedal Inst.FE ECO Drive Report Display View History Welcome Effect Dial Effect Display Effect 2-26 Instruments and controls Result Displays the available options. Allows user to turn the home screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the average speed screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the trip display on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the fuel economy display on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the navigation display on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual. Allows user to turn the audio screen on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual. Allows user to turn the cruise control display on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the driving aids display on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Driver Assistance” in this section. Allows user to turn the tire pressure display on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the 4x4–i display on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the chassis control display on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to select the color of the vehicle displayed in the vehicle information display. Displays the available options for ECO mode settings. Allows the user to turn the ECO indicator on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to select how the ECO mode in displayed. Select to have the ECO mode shown as a pedal display. Select to have the ECO mode shown as instant fuel economy. Displays the available options for the ECO drive report. Allows user to turn the ECO drive report on or off. Allows user to view and reset ECO drive report history. Displays the available options for the welcome effect. Allows user to turn the dial effect on or off. Allows user to turn the display effect on or off. Vehicle Settings The vehicle settings allow the user to change the settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, and other vehicle settings. Menu item Lighting Welcome Light Auto Room Lamp Light Sensitivity (if so equipped) Light Off Delay (if so equipped) Turn indicator 3 Flash Pass Locking I-Key Door Lock (if so equipped) Selective Unlock Auto Door Unlock Ignition OFF Shift to Park Off Answer Bk. Horn Wipers Speed Dependent Reverse Link (if so equipped) Drip Wipe Result Displays the available lighting options. Allows user to turn the welcome light on or off. Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off. Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle. Allows user to change the duration of time that the automatic headlights stay on after the vehicle is shut off. Displays the available turn indicator options. Allows user to turn the 3 flash pass feature on or off. Displays the available locking options. Allows user to turn I-Key door lock on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated. Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked after the door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 5 seconds. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once. Displays the auto door unlock options. Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off. Doors will have to be manually unlocked. Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators will flash once when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key. Displays the available wiper options. Allows user to turn wiper with speed on or off. Allows user to turn the reverse link feature on or off. Allows user to turn the drip wipe feature on or off. Instruments and controls 2-27 Menu item Battery Saver (if so equipped) Driving Position (if so equipped) Exit Seat Slide Remote Start (if so equipped) Rear Door Alert Horn & Alert Alert Only OFF 2-28 Instruments and controls Result Allows user to turn the battery saver on or off. When turned on, the battery saver automatically turns off the ignition after a period of time when the ignition switch is left in the ON position. Displays the available driving position options. Allows the user to turn the exit seat slide on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the driver’s seat backward for an easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the driver’s seat will move to the previous set position. For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual. Allows user to turn the Remote Engine Start on or off. When turned on, the engine can be restarted remotely. For additional information, refer to “Remote Engine Start” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual. Displays the available Rear Door Alert options. When selected, the alert is displayed; and the horn sounds. When selected, only the alert is displayed. When selected, no alert or horn will be active. Maintenance The maintenance menu allows the user to set reminders for various vehicle maintenance items. Menu item Maintenance Oil and Filter Tire Other WARNING The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional information, refer to “Changing wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual. Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death. Result Displays various maintenance reminder options. Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Instruments and controls 2-29 Alarm The alarm menu allows the user to set specific alarms for various items on the vehicle. Menu item Timer Alert Navigation (if so equipped) Phone Mail Result Allows user to set the timer alert alarm. Allows user to turn the navigation alarm on or off. Allows user to turn the phone alarm on or off. Allows user to turn the mail alarm on or off. Tire Pressures The tire pressure menu allows the user to change the units for the tire pressure display. Menu item Result Tire Pressure Unit Displays available units for tire pressure display. Unit The unit menu allows the user to customize the information that appears in the vehicle information display. Menu item Mileage Tire Pressures (if so equipped) Temperature 2-30 Instruments and controls Result Displays available mileage options shown in the vehicle information display. Displays available tire pressures options shown in the vehicle information display. Displays available temperature options shown in the vehicle information display. Language The language menu allows the user to change the languages displayed in the vehicle information display. Menu item Language Result Displays available language options for the vehicle information display. Factory Reset The factory reset menu allows the user to restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status. Menu item Factory Reset Result Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, the user can confirm or cancel the reset. Instruments and controls 2-31 LIC4081 2-32 Instruments and controls LIC4082 Instruments and controls 2-33 VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY WARNINGS AND INDICATORS 1. Engine start operation 2. No Key Detected (if so equipped) 3. Shift to Park 4. Key Battery Low (if so equipped) 5. Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system (if I-Key battery level is low) (if so equipped) 6. Key ID incorrect (if so equipped) 17. AWD High Temp. Stop vehicle (if so equipped) 33. Unavailable: High Cabin Temp (if so equipped) 18. AWD Tire Size Incorrect: See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped) 34. Unavailable: Road is slippery (if so equipped) 19. Battery Voltage Low Charge Battery 35. Unavailable: VDC OFF (if so equipped) 20. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse 36. Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction (if so equipped) 21. Power will turn off to save the battery 22. Power turned off to save the battery 23. Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights 7. Release Parking Brake 24. Headlight System Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped) 8. Low Fuel 25. Timer Alert — Time for a driver break? 9. Low Washer Fluid (if so equipped) 26. Chassis Control System Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped) 10. Door/liftgate Open 11. Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped) 12. Loose Fuel Cap 13. Tire Pressure Low — Add Air 14. Flat Tire — Visit dealer (if so equipped) 27. Cruise control indicator (if so equipped) 28. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicators (if so equipped) 29. Transmission Shift Position indicator 30. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual 15. Low Oil Pressure Stop Vehicle 31. Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped) 16. AWD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped) 32. Drive mode indicators 2-34 Instruments and controls 37. Side Radar Obstruction 38. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator (if so equipped) 39. Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) indicator (if so equipped) 40. Steering Assist equipped) indicator (if so 41. Not Available Poor Road Conditions (if so equipped) 42. Currently not available (if so equipped) 43. Not Available Front Camera structed (if so equipped) Ob- 44. Steering Assist Currently unavailable (if so equipped) 45. Not Available Front camera visibility impaired (if so equipped) 46. Not Available Parking Brake On (if so equipped) 47. Not Available Seat Belt Not Fastened (if so equipped) 48. Step on Brake Now (if so equipped) 49. Steering Assist Alert (if so equipped) 50. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) emergency warning indicator 51. Rear Door Alert is activated 52. Check Rear Seat for All Articles 53. Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) indicator (if so equipped) 54. Rear Sonar System (RSS) indicator (if so equipped) 55. Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped) 56. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator 57. System Fault (if so equipped) Engine start operation This indicator appears when the shift lever is in the P (Park) position. This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed. You can start the engine from any position of the ignition switch. No Key Detected (if so equipped) This warning appears when the Intelligent Key is left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position. Make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. For additional information about the Intelligent Key, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual. Shift to Park This warning illuminates when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also, a chime sounds when the ignition switch is in the OFF position. If this warning illuminates, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and start the engine. Key Battery Low (if so equipped) This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power. If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual. Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system (if I-Key battery level is low) (if so equipped) This indicator appears when the battery of the Intelligent Key is low and when the Intelligent Key system and the vehicle are not communicating normally. If this appears, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Key ID incorrect (if so equipped) This warning appears when the ignition switch is placed from the OFF position and the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the system. You cannot start the engine with an unregistered key. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual. Instruments and controls 2-35 Release Parking Brake This warning illuminates in the message area of the vehicle information display when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven. Low Fuel This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty). Low Washer Fluid (if so equipped) This warning illuminates when the windshield-washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary. For additional information, refer to “Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual. Door/liftgate Open This warning illuminates when a door or the liftgate has been opened. 2-36 Instruments and controls Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped) After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds and then turns off. The Key System Error message warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Key system. If the light comes on while the engine is stopped, it may be impossible to start the engine. If the light comes on while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. However in these cases, contact a NISSAN dealer for repair as soon as possible. Loose Fuel Cap This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. For additional information, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected. The warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information, refer to “Low tire pressure warning light” in this section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Flat Tire – Visit dealer (if so equipped) This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and one or more flat tires are detected while driving. A chime also sounds for approximately 10 seconds. Low Oil Pressure Stop Vehicle This warning appears in the message area of the vehicle information display if low oil pressure is detected. This gauge is not designed to indicate low oil level. The low oil pressure warning is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional information, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual. AWD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped) This warning appears when the all-wheel drive system is not functioning properly while the engine is running. AWD High Temp. Stop vehicle (if so equipped) This warning may appear while trying to free a stuck vehicle due to increased oil temperature. The driving mode may change to 2-Wheel Drive (2WD). If this warning is displayed, stop the vehicle with the engine idling, as soon as it is safe to do so. Then if the warning turns off, you can continue driving. AWD Tire Size Incorrect: See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped) This warning may appear if there is a large difference between the diameters of the front and rear wheels. Pull off the road in a safe area, with the engine idling. Check that all the tire sizes are the same, that the tire pressure is correct and that the tires are not excessively worn. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse This warning may appear if the extended storage switch is not pushed in. When this warning appears, push in the extended storage switch to turn off the warning. For additional information, refer to “Extended storage switch” in this section. Power will turn off to save the battery This warning appears in the message area of the vehicle information display after a period of time if the shift lever has not moved from the P (Park) position. Power turned off to save the battery This warning appears after the ignition switch is automatically turned off to save the battery. Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights This warning appears when the headlights are left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle. Place the headlight switch to OFF or AUTO position. For additional information, refer to “Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section. Headlight System Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped) This warning illuminates when there is an error with the system. For additional information, refer to “Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section. Timer Alert – Time for a driver break? This indicator appears when the set time is reached. The time can be set up to six hours. For additional information on setting the timer, refer to “Alarm” in this section. Chassis Control System Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped) This warning appears if the Integrated Dynamics-control Module detects an error in the Intelligent Trace Control, Intelligent Engine Brake, or the Active Ride Control systems. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to “Chassis control” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Battery Voltage Low Charge Battery Cruise control indicator (if so equipped) This warning appears when the battery is low and needs to be charged. This indicator shows the cruise control system status. Instruments and controls 2-37 For additional information, refer to “Cruise control” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicators (if so equipped) These indicators show the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system status. The status is shown by color. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Transmission Shift Position Indicator This indicator shows the transmission shift position. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual This warning illuminates when there is a problem with the CVT system. If this warning comes on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped) This warning appears when one or more of the following systems (if so equipped) is not functioning properly: ∙ Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) 2-38 Instruments and controls ∙ Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection vention (I-LI)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. ∙ Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) Unavailable: Road is slippery (if so equipped) ∙ Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW) ∙ Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) If one or more of these warning appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Drive mode indicators These indicators illuminate in the vehicle information display when either the ECO or SPORT modes are selected. For additional information, refer to “SPORT mode switch” or “ECO mode switch” in the “Starting and driving” or the section of this manual. Unavailable: High Cabin Temp. (if so equipped) This message appears when the camera detects an interior temperature of more than approximately 104°F (40°C). For additional information, refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” and “Intelligent Lane Inter- This message appears when the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system becomes unavailable because the road is slippery. For additional information, refer to “ Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Unavailable: VDC OFF (if so equipped) This message appears when the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system becomes unavailable because the VDC is turned off. For additional information, refer to “ Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction (if so equipped) This message appears when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC), Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB), Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection, and/or ProPILOT Assist system(s) become unavailable because the front radar is obstructed. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)”, “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)”, “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection” and/or “ProPILOT Assist” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Side Radar Obstruction This message appears when the Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable because a radar blockage is detected. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” or “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator (if so equipped) This indicator shows when the LDW and Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) systems are engaged. For additional information, refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system” and “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) indicator (if so equipped) This indicator shows when the I-LI system is engaged. For additional information, refer to “Dynamic driver assistance switch” in this section and “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Steering Assist indicator (if so equipped) This indicator appears when the Steering Assist system is engaged. For additional information, refer to “ProPILOT Assist” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Not Available Poor Road Conditions (if so equipped) This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT Assist) system , the ICC system or the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system is engaged. Under the following conditions, the ICC (with ProPILOT Assist) , the ICC system or the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system is automatically canceled: ∙ When the VDC operates ∙ When a wheel slips The above system cannot be used in some situations (VDC operates and wheel slip.) Currently not available (if so equipped) This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT Assist) system, the ICC system, or the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system is engaged. Under the following conditions, the ICC (with ProPILOT Assist), the ICC system, or the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system is automatically canceled: ∙ When the VDC system is turned off The above system cannot be used in some situations (VDC system is off). Not Available Front Camera Obstructed (if so equipped) This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT Assist) system is engaged. Under the following conditions, the ICC (with ProPILOT Assist) system is automatically canceled: ∙ The camera area of the windshield is fogged up or covered with dirt, water, drops, ice, snow, etc. Instruments and controls 2-39 ∙ Strong light, such as sunlight or high beams from oncoming vehicles, enter the front camera ∙ When the wiper (HI) operates The system will be available when the above conditions no longer exist. If the warning message continues to appear, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and clean the windshield. Steering Assist Currently unavailable (if so equipped) This message may appear when the Steering Assist system is engaged. Under the following conditions, the Steering Assist system is automatically canceled: ∙ When the wiper (LO) operates ∙ When lane markers in the traveling lane cannot be correctly detected for a period of time due to such items as a snow rut, reflection of light on a rainy day or several unclear lane markers are present 2-40 Instruments and controls If you want to use the Steering Assist system again, cancel the ProPILOT Assist system and set it again when lane markers are clearly visible. Not Available Front camera visibility is impaired (if so equipped) This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT Assist) system is engaged. Under the following conditions, the ICC (with ProPILOT Assist) system is automatically canceled: ∙ The camera area of the windshield is fogged up or covered with dirt, water, drops, ice, snow, etc. ∙ Strong light, such as sunlight or high beams from oncoming vehicles, enter the front camera ∙ When the wiper (HI) operates The system will be available when the above conditions no longer exist. If the warning message continues to appear, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and clean the windshield. Not Available Parking Brake On (if so equipped) This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT Assist) system is engaged. Under the following condition, the ICC (with ProPILOT Assist) system is automatically canceled: ∙ The electronic parking brake is applied The above system cannot be used when the electric parking brake is activated. Not Available Seat Belt Not Fastened (if so equipped) This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT Assist) system is engaged. Under the following condition, the ICC (with ProPILOT Assist) system is automatically canceled: ∙ When the driver’s seat belt is not fastened The above system cannot be used when the driver’s seat belt is not fastened. Step on Brake Now (if so equipped) This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT Assist) system is engaged. It will be displayed under the following condition: ∙ While the vehicle is stopped by the ICC (with ProPILOT Assist), the driver’s door is opened but the electronic parking brake was not activated. Please step on the brake immediately. Steering Assist Alert (if so equipped) This message may appear when the Steering Assist system is engaged. It will be displayed under the following condition: ∙ When not holding the steering wheel or when there is no steering wheel operation Please hold on the steering wheel immediately. When the steering operation is detected, the warning turns off and the steering assist function is automatically restored. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) emergency warning indicator This indicator illuminates along, with an audible warning, when the system detects the possibility of a forward collision. For additional information, refer to “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)” and “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. WARNING Selecting “Dismiss Message” during a stop within a trip temporarily dismisses the message for that stop without turning the system off. Alerts can be provided for other stops during the trip. Selecting “Disable Alert” turns off the Rear Door Alert system for the remainder of a trip and no audible alert will be provided. Rear Door Alert is activated NOTE: When the system is enabled, this message appears when the Rear Door Alert system is active and can remind the driver to check the back seat. This system is disabled until a driver enables it using the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “How to use the vehicle information display” in this section. ∙ Using the steering wheel switch, a driver can select “Dismiss Message” to clear the display for a period of time. If no selection is made, this message automatically turns off after a period of time. ∙ Using the steering wheel switch, a driver can select “Disable Alert” to disable the horn alert for the remainder of the current trip. For additional information, refer to “Rear Door Alert” in this section. Check Rear Seat For All Articles When the system is enabled, this message appears when the vehicle comes to a complete stop, the vehicle is transitioned from the D (Drive) position to P (Park) position, and the driver exits the vehicle. This message alerts the driver, after a period of time, to check for items in the rear seat after the audible alert has been provided. Instruments and controls 2-41 SECURITY SYSTEMS NOTE: This system is disabled until a driver enables it using the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “How to use the vehicle information display” in this section. For additional information, refer to “Rear Door Alert” in this section. Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped) This warning illuminates when there is an error with the system. For additional information, refer to “Rear Sonar System (RSS)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) indicator (if so equipped) This indicator shows when the BSW system is engaged. This indicator illuminates to indicate the status of the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system. For additional information, refer to “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Rear Sonar System (RSS) indicator (if so equipped) This indicator illuminates to indicate the status of the RSS. For additional information, refer to “Rear Sonar System (RSS)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. 2-42 Instruments and controls System Fault (if so equipped) This warning appears if there is a malfunction in the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system. For additional information, refer to “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. LIC2385 Your vehicle may have two types of security systems: ∙ Vehicle security system ∙ NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors or liftgate when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs. The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period. Never leave your keys in the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible. Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features. How to arm the vehicle security system 1. Close all windows. (The system can be armed even if the windows are open.) 2. Remove the keys from the vehicle. 3. Close all doors and liftgate. Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with the key fob (if so equipped), Intelligent Key (if so equipped), or door handle request switch. security indica4. Confirm that the tor light stays on for about 30 seconds. The vehicle security system is now prearmed. The vehicle security system will automatically shift into the armed security light begins phase. The to flash once every three seconds. If during the pre-armed phase one of the following occurs, the system will not arm: ∙ Any door is unlocked with the key fob (if so equipped), the Intelligent Key (if so equipped), or door request switch. ∙ Ignition switch is placed in the ON position. ∙ Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will activate with all the doors, hood and liftgate locked with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position. When placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the system will be released. Vehicle security system activation The vehicle security system will give the following alarm: ∙ The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently but synchronously. ∙ The alarm automatically turns off after a period of time. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm is activated by: ∙ opening any door or the liftgate without using the key fob (if so equipped) or Intelligent Key (if so equipped) (even if the door is unlocked by releasing the door inside lock knob). How to stop an activated alarm The alarm stops only by unlocking a door or the liftgate with the key fob (if so button on equipped), pressing the the Intelligent Key (if so equipped), or pushing the request switch on the driver’s or passenger’s door with the Intelligent Key (if so equipped) in range of the door handle. Instruments and controls 2-43 NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key. Never leave these keys in the vehicle. FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For Canada: This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. LIC0474 Security indicator light NOTE: The security indicator light blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is operational. 2-44 Instruments and controls If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, the light will remain on while the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, seek service for the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. Please bring all registered keys that you have. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. CAUTION ∙ Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds. ∙ Do not operate the washer if the windshield-washer fluid reservoir is empty. LIC2661 SWITCH OPERATION WARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield. ∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with windshield-washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based windshield-washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. ∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the windshield-washer fluid concentrate and water. Instruments and controls 2-45 NOTE: If the windshield wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF position and remove the snow or ice that is on and around the wiper arms. In approximately 1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the wiper. The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed: 䊊 1 2 䊊 3 䊊 Intermittent — intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob A (Slower) or 䊊 B (Faster). Also, toward 䊊 the intermittent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed. (For example, when the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be faster.) Low — continuous low speed operation High — continuous high speed operation 4 to have one sweep opLift the lever up 䊊 eration (MIST) of the wiper. 2-46 Instruments and controls 5 to operate the Pull the lever toward you 䊊 washer. The wiper will also operate several times. After a short delay the drip wipe function will operate the wiper once more to clear remaining windshield-washer fluid from the windshield. NOTE: The Speed Dependent feature and Drip Wipe feature may be disabled. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section. LIC2662 REAR SWITCH OPERATION WARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the window and obscure your vision. Warm the rear window with the defroster before you wash the rear window. REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR (if so equipped) DEFROSTER SWITCH CAUTION ∙ Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds. ∙ Do not operate the washer if the windshield-washer fluid reservoir is empty. ∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with windshield-washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based windshield-washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. ∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the windshield-washer fluid concentrate and water. NOTE: If the rear window wiper operation is interrupted by snow, etc., the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to OFF and remove the snow, etc. on and around the wiper arms. After about 1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the wiper. The rear window wiper and washer operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position to operate the wiper. 1 䊊 2 䊊 Intermittent — intermittent operation (not adjustable) Low — continuous low speed operation 3 to operate the Push the switch forward 䊊 washer. The wiper will also operate several times. NOTE: The Reverse Link feature may be disabled. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section. LIC2614 Type A (if so equipped) To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch on. The rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes. CAUTION When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster. Instruments and controls 2-47 HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH LIC2324 LIC2634 Type B (if so equipped) Type A (if so equipped) HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH Lighting 1 䊊 2 䊊 2-48 Instruments and controls Rotate the switch to the position, and the front parking, tail, license plate, and instrument panel lights will come on. Rotate the switch to the position, and the headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on. LIC2635 Type B (if so equipped) CAUTION Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. NOTE: Autolight activation sensitivity and the time delay for autolight shutoff can be adjusted. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section. To turn on the autolight system: 1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO 1 . position 䊊 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off. LIC2636 Autolight system (if so equipped) The autolight system allows the headlights to turn on and off automatically. The autolight system can: ∙ Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights automatically when it is dark. ∙ Turn off all the lights when it is light. ∙ Keep all the lights on for a period of time after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position and all doors are closed. Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and a door is opened and left open, the headlights remain on for a period of time. If another door is opened while the headlights are on, then the timer is reset. To turn the autolight system off, turn the , or position. switch to the OFF, LIC3051 Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor located in the top 1 of the instrument panel. The auside 䊊 tolight sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate. If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the ignition switch placed in the ON position, your vehicle’s battery could become discharged. Instruments and controls 2-49 High Beam Assist (if so equipped) The High Beam Assist system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and above. If an oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle appears in front of your vehicle when the headlight high beam is on, the headlight will be switched to the low beam automatically. WARNING LIC2637 Headlight beam select 1 䊊 2 䊊 3 䊊 To select the high beam function, push the lever forward. The high beam lights light illumicome on and the nates. ∙ The High Beam Assist system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for safe driving operation. The driver should remain alert at all times, ensure safe driving practices and switch the high beams and low beam manually when necessary. Pull the lever back to select the low beam. ∙ The high beam or low beam may not switch automatically under the following conditions. Switch the high beam and low beam manually. Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off. – During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, wind, etc.). – When a light source similar to a headlight or tail light is in the vicinity of the vehicle. 2-50 Instruments and controls – When the headlights of the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle are turned off, when the color of the light is affected due to foreign materials on the lights, or when the light beam is out of position. – When there is a sudden, continuous change in brightness. – When driving on a road that passes over rolling hills, or a road that has level differences. – When driving on a road with many curves. – When a sign or mirror-like surface is reflecting intense light towards the front of the vehicle. – When the container, etc. being towed by a leading vehicle is reflecting intense light. – When a headlight on your vehicle is damaged or dirty. – When the vehicle is leaning at an angle due to a punctured tire, being towed, etc. When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 16 mph (25 km/h), the headlight uses the low beam. To turn off the High Beam Assist system, positurn the headlight switch to the tion or select the low beam position by placing the lever in the neutral position. ∙ The timing of switching the low beam and high beam may change under the following situations. – The brightness of the headlights of the oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle. – The movement and direction of the oncoming vehicle and the leading vehicle. – When only one light on the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle is illuminated. – When the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle is a two-wheeled vehicle. – Road conditions (incline, curve, the road surface, etc.). – The number of passengers and the amount of luggage. LIC3696 High Beam Assist operation To activate the High Beam Assist system, turn the headlight switch to the AUTO po1 and push the lever forward 䊊 2 sition 䊊 (high beam position). The High Beam Assist indicator light in the meter will illuminate while the headlights are turned on. If the High Beam Assist indicator light does not illuminate in the above condition, it may indicate that the system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Instruments and controls 2-51 ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas around the ambient image sensor. Do not touch the sensor lens that is located on the ambient image sensor. If the ambient image sensor is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Battery saver system The battery saver system automatically turns off the ignition after a period of time when the ignition switch is left in the ON position. LSD2712 Ambient image sensor maintenance 1 for the High The ambient image sensor 䊊 Beam Assist system is located in front of the inside mirror. To maintain the proper operation of the high beam assist system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following: ∙ Always keep the windshield clean. ∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the ambient image sensor. 2-52 Instruments and controls The battery saver system automatically turns off the following lights after a period of time when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and the doors are closed: ∙ Headlights, when the headlight switch is in the or position ∙ Interior lights, when left in the ON position CAUTION Even though the battery saver feature automatically turns off the headlights after a period of time, you should turn the headlight switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) SYSTEM The LED portion of the headlights automatically illuminate at 100% intensity when the engine is started and the parking brake released. The LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system operates with the headlight switch in the OFF position. When you turn position the headlight switch to the for full illumination, the LED lights switch from LED DRL system to the park function. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the LED DRL system does not illuminate. The LED DRL system illuminates when the parking brake is released. The LED DRL system will remain on until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight switch on for interior controls and switches to illuminate, as those remain off while the switch is in the OFF position. WARNING When the LED DRL system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others. LIC2624 INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL A to decrease the Press the “-” button 䊊 brightness of instrument panel lights. LIC2638 TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Turn signal 1 䊊 B to increase the Press the “+” button 䊊 brightness of instrument panel lights. Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signal cancels automatically. Lane change signal 2 䊊 Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever until the lane change is completed. Instruments and controls 2-53 Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, and release the lever. The turn signal will automatically flash three times. Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane change based on road and traffic conditions. The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected. NOTE: The 3 flash pass feature may be disabled. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section. LIC2639 FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped) To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the position, then turn the fog light switch to the position. To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position, the headlights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to position. the To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch to the OFF position. 2-54 Instruments and controls HORN HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so equipped) WARNING Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat heater if you or the occupants cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in body parts that contact the seat. Use of the seat heater by such people could result in serious injury. ∙ When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials. ∙ If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. CAUTION LIC3568 To sound the horn, push near the horn icon on the steering wheel. WARNING Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. ∙ The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running. ∙ Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat. ∙ Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated. ∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater. ∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth. Instruments and controls 2-55 HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH (if so equipped) Push the switch again to turn the heated steering wheel system off manually. The indicator light will go off. NOTE: If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch is turned on, the system will not heat the steering wheel. This is not a malfunction. LIC3475 LIC3476 The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C). 1. Start the engine. 2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as desired. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate. The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on. 3. When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to push the switch to turn it off. 2-56 Instruments and controls Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm the steering wheel after the engine starts. The indicator light will come on. If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the steering wheel and cycle off and on to maintain a temperature above 68°F (20°C). The indicator light will remain on as long as the system is on. DYNAMIC DRIVER ASSISTANCE SWITCH (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped) STEERING ASSIST SWITCH (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped) The I-LI system warns the driver with a warning light and a chime, and helps assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane by applying the brakes to the left or right wheels individually (for a short period of time). For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in the “Starting and driving” section and “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. LIC3681 LIC3853 The dynamic driver assistance switch is used to temporarily turn on and off the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system that is activated using the settings menu of the vehicle information display. The Steering Assist switch is used to turn on and off the Steering Assist system that is activated using the settings menu of the vehicle information display. The I-LI system must be turned on with the dynamic driver assistance switch every time the ignition is placed in the ON position. The Steering Assist system controls the steering system to help keep your vehicle near the center of the lane when driving. For additional information, refer to ”ProPILOT Assist” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. When the dynamic driver assistance 1 on the switch is turned off, the indicator 䊊 switch is off. The indicator will also be off if the I-LI system is deactivated using the vehicle information display. Instruments and controls 2-57 VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF SWITCH ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) LOCK SWITCH (if so equipped) Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. LIC3344 LIC2645 The vehicle should be driven with the VDC system on for most driving conditions. The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK switch is located on the instrument panel. The AWD LOCK indicator light will illuminate when the switch is turned on. For additional information, refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in this section and “AWD Lock Switch Operations” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off. To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC indicator light and OFF switch. The the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system warning light will come on. 2-58 Instruments and controls Each time you push the switch, the AWD mode will switch: AUTO →LOCK → AUTO. REAR DOOR ALERT The Rear Door Alert system functions under certain conditions to indicate there may be an object or passenger in the rear seat(s). Check the seat(s) before exiting the vehicle. The Rear Door Alert system is initially disabled. The driver can enable the system using the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display warnings and indicators” in this section. When the system is enabled: ∙ The system is activated when a rear door is opened and closed within 10 minutes of the vehicle being driven. When the vehicle is started and the system is activated, a visual message appears in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Rear Door Alert is activated” in this section. ∙ If a rear door is opened and closed but the vehicle is not driven within approximately 10 minutes, the system will not be activated. A rear door must be opened and closed and the car driven within 10 minutes for the system to activate. When the Rear Door Alert system is activated: ∙ When the driver puts the vehicle in the P (Park) position, a notification message appears in the vehicle information display with the options to “Dismiss Message” or “Disable Alert” if desired. ∙ Select “Disable Alert” to temporarily disable for that stop. ∙ No selection or ‘Dismiss Message” will keep the alert enabled for that stop. ∙ If the alert is enabled when a driver exits the vehicle, a message will appear in the vehicle information display that states “Check Rear Seat for All Articles.” If “Horn & Alert” setting is selected: ∙ An audible horn sound will occur after a short time unless a rear door is opened and closed within a short time to deactivate the alert. NOTE: If “Alert Only” setting is selected, the message alert will still be shown in the vehicle information display but the horn will not sound. WARNING ∙ If the driver selects “Disable Alert”, no audible alert will be provided regardless of rear door open/close status. ∙ There may be times when there is an object or passenger in the rear seat(s) but the audible alert does not sound. For example, this may occur if rear seat passengers enter or exit the vehicle during a trip. ∙ The system does not directly detect objects or passengers in the rear seat(s). Instead, it can detect when a rear door is opened and closed, indicating that there may be something in the rear seat(s). ∙ If the doors are locked before the alert is deactivated by opening a rear door, the horn will sound. ∙ If the liftgate is opened before a rear door is opened, the horn will be delayed until after the liftgate is closed. Instruments and controls 2-59 E-CALL (SOS) BUTTON (if so equipped) POWER OUTLETS NOTE: There may be times when the horn sounds but there are no objects or passengers in the rear seat(s). For additional information, refer to “Rear Door Alert is activated” in this section. LIC4110 LIC3357 The E-call (SOS) button is used in combination with a NissanConnect® Services subscription to call for assistance in case of an emergency. Pressing the button will (with a paid subscription) reach a response specialist that will provide assistance based on the situation described by the vehicle’s occupant. For additional information, or to enroll your vehicle, refer to www.NissanUSA.com/ connect, www.Nissan.ca/NissanConnect, or www.Nissan.ca/NissanConnect/fr or call 855–426–6628. 2-60 Instruments and controls Instrument Panel 12V OUTLETS The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. They are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum. The front and center console power outlets are powered only when the ignition switch is in the ON position, or while the accessory power is active. NOTE: ∙ When the ignition is in the OFF position, the front and center console power outlets stop delivering power one minute after the door is opened and stays open. ∙ If the door remains closed after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the front and center console power outlets continue to deliver power until the accessory power timer has elapsed. ∙ The cargo area power outlet(s) continues to deliver power normally. LIC3697 Center Console CAUTION ∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use. ∙ Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information. ∙ Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. LIC2617 Cargo Area ∙ Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory. ∙ Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. ∙ Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on. ∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF. Instruments and controls 2-61 EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH ∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open. ∙ When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet. LIC3266 LIC3359 OFF position 2-62 Instruments and controls STORAGE LIC3268 ON position The extended storage switch is used when shipping the vehicle. It is located in the fuse panel on the driver’s side of the instrument panel. If any electrical equipment does not operate, ensure the extended storage switch is pushed fully in place, as shown. To inspect the extended storage switch, ensure the ignition switch and headlight switch are off, remove the fuse box cover A using a suitable tool in combination 䊊 with a cloth to avoid damaging the trim. LIC2308 FRONT-DOOR POCKETS LIC2618 SEATBACK POCKETS There is a pocket located on the back of the driver and passenger seats. These pockets can be used to store maps. WARNING To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s advanced air bag system, please observe the following items: ∙ Do not allow a passenger in the 2nd row to push or pull on the seatback pocket. Instruments and controls 2-63 ∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint/headrest or in the seatback pocket. LIC3718 CONSOLE BOX Open the glove box by pulling the handle. To open the console box, press in on the 1 and raise the lid 䊊 2 . lever 䊊 WARNING Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop. 2-64 Instruments and controls LIC3698 GLOVE BOX To close, push the lid down until the lock latches. CAUTION ∙ Do not use for anything other than sunglasses. ∙ Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses. LIC2619 LIC2312 OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES STORAGE Front console CUP HOLDERS To open the sunglasses holder, push and release. Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder. WARNING Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to avoid obstructing the driver’s view and to help prevent an accident. Instruments and controls 2-65 LIC2620 2nd row LIC2622 Bottle holder — front LIC2623 Bottle holder — rear WARNING ∙ Do not recline the rear seatback when you use the cup holders on the rear armrest. Doing so may cause the beverages to spill over, and if they are hot, they may scald the passengers. ∙ Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. 2-66 Instruments and controls CAUTION Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident CAUTION ∙ Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident. ∙ Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers. LIC2646 DIVIDE-N-HIDE® ADJUSTABLE FLOOR WARNING Do not put objects heavier than 165 lbs. (75 kg) on the Divide-N-Hide® while in the mid position. In the upper position, objects should not weigh more than 30 lbs. (14 kg). LIC2647 To move the adjustable floor from the lower position to the upper position: 1. Use the handle to lift the adjustable floor. 2. Move the adjustable floor to the upper guide track and ensure it is secure in place. There are multiple positions for the adjustable floor. The upper position allows for additional storage below the adjustable floor. Instruments and controls 2-67 WARNING ∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. ∙ Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure cargo. LIC2629 LUGGAGE HOOKS (if so equipped) When securing items using luggage hooks located on the side finisher do not apply a load over more than 6.5 lbs. (29 N) to a single hook. The luggage hooks that are located on the floor should have loads less than 110 lbs. (490 N) to a single hook. The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps. ∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. ∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. ∙ The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area. Secure any items in the cargo area. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged. ∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. 2-68 Instruments and controls CARGO COVER (if so equipped) WARNING ∙ Do not place objects on the cargo cover while the vehicle is parked or in motion, no matter how small. The object on the cargo cover could cause an injury in an accident or sudden stop, and/or the cargo cover can become damaged. ∙ Do not leave the cargo cover in the vehicle with it disengaged from the holder. ∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. To open the cargo cover, extend the cover 1 to lock into place. into the grooves 䊊 ∙ Properly secure cargo and do not allow it to contact the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor. Cargo that is not properly secured or cargo that contacts the top tether strap may damage the top tether strap during a collision. If the cargo cover contacts the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor, remove the cargo cover from the vehicle or secure it on the cargo floor below its attachment location. If the cargo cover is not removed, it may damage the top tether strap during a collision. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the child restraint top tether strap is damaged. LIC3971 The cargo cover keeps the luggage compartment contents hidden from the outside. To close the cargo cover, remove the cover 1 and retract. from the grooves 䊊 Instruments and controls 2-69 ∙ Heavy loading of the crossbars has the potential to affect the vehicle stability and handling during sudden or unusual handling maneuvers. ∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. LIC4202 ROOF RACK (if so equipped) WARNING ∙ Always install the crossbars onto the roof side rails before loading cargo of any kind. Loading cargo directly onto the roof side rails or the vehicle’s roof may cause vehicle damage. ∙ Roof rack cross bars should be evenly distributed. ∙ Do not exceed maximum roof rack crossbars load capacity and always distribute the load uniformly. 2-70 Instruments and controls ∙ Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is loaded at or near the cargo carrying capacity, especially if the significant portion of that load is carried on the crossbars. CAUTION ∙ Use care when placing or removing items from the roof rack. If you cannot comfortably lift the items onto the roof rack from the ground, use a ladder or a stool. Do not apply any load directly to the roof A . Crossbars 䊊 B must be inside rails 䊊 stalled before applying load/cargo/ luggage to the roof of the vehicle. Genuine NISSAN accessory crossbars may be available through a NISSAN dealer. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information. The service load capacity for the roof side rails is 165 lbs. (74 kg), however do not exceed the crossbars load capacity. Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and rear). For additional information regarding GVWR and GAWR, refer to: ∙ “Vehicle loading information” or the “Dimensions and weights” table in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. WINDOWS POWER WINDOWS To open a window, push the switch to the first detent and continue to hold down until the desired window position is reached. To close a window, pull the switch to the first detent and continue to hold up until the desired window position is reached. WARNING ∙ Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows. ∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets. The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s door is opened during this period of time, the power to the windows is canceled. Locking passengers’ windows When the window lock switch is depressed, only the driver’s side window can be opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock function. LIC3208 Driver’s side power window switches 1. Window lock button 2. Power door lock switch 3. Front passenger side switch 4. Right rear passenger side switch 5. Left rear passenger side switch 6. Driver side automatic switch The driver’s side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all of the windows. Instruments and controls 2-71 LIC2309 Front passenger’s power window switch The passenger’s window switch operates only the corresponding passenger’s window. To open the window partially, push the 1 lightly until the desired switch down 䊊 window position is reached. To close the 2 until window partially, pull the switch up 䊊 the desired window position is reached. 2-72 Instruments and controls LIC2663 LIC0410 Rear power window switch Automatic operation The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows. To open the window, push the switch and hold 1 . To close the window, pull the it down 䊊 2 . switch up 䊊 To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, push the window switch down to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window automatically opens all the way. To stop the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening. To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation, pull the switch up to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. To stop the window, push the switch down while the window is closing. POWER MOONROOF (if so equipped) Auto-reverse function (if so equipped) Sliding the moonroof To fully open the moonroof, slide the switch 1 position to the second toward the OPEN 䊊 detent and release it. If the switch is slid to the first detent and released while the sunshade is closed only the sunshade will open. The auto-reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation. Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs. WARNING There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window. If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, replaced, or jump started, the power window auto-reverse function may not operate properly. Have the power window autoreverse system re-initialized. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. If the control unit detects something caught in a window equipped with automatic operation as it is closing, the window will be immediately lowered. LIC3477 The moonroof will only operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The moonroof is operational for a period of time, even if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s door or the front passenger’s door is opened during this period of time, the power to the moonroof is canceled. When operating the power moonroof or panoramic sunshade, the switch need not be held continuously. To stop the moonroof or sunshade at any point while it is opening or closing, slide the switch momentarily. To fully close the moonroof, slide the switch 2 position to the sectoward the CLOSE 䊊 ond detent and release it. If the switch is slid to the first detent and released, the moonroof will close but the sunshade will remain open. Tilting the moonroof To tilt the moonroof up, push and release 3 . If the moonroof is open, it the tilt switch 䊊 will automatically close and then tilt up. To tilt the moonroof down but keep the sunshade open, push and release the tilt 3 or slide the switch toward the switch 䊊 2 to the first detent. CLOSE position 䊊 To tilt the moonroof down and close the sunshade at the same time, slide the 2 to the switch toward the CLOSE position 䊊 second detent. Instruments and controls 2-73 Auto-reverse function (when closing or tilting down the moonroof) The auto-reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed or tilted down by automatic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the moonroof occurs. WARNING There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the moonroof. When closing If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof will immediately open backward. 2-74 Instruments and controls When tilting down Panoramic sunshade If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will immediately tilt up. The panoramic sunshade operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position. When opening or closing the sunshade the switch need not be held. If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and repeats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds after it happens; the moonroof will fully close gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the moonroof. WARNING ∙ In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints. ∙ Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing. CAUTION ∙ Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the moonroof before opening. ∙ Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area. To open the sunshade: ∙ To fully open the sunshade, slide the 1 toward the OPEN position to switch 䊊 the first detent. ∙ To fully open the sunshade and the 1 moonroof together, slide the switch 䊊 toward the OPEN position to the second detent. To close the sunshade: ∙ To fully close the sunshade, slide the 2 toward the CLOSE position to switch 䊊 the second detent. If the moonroof is open, both the moonroof and the sunshade will close automatically. 2 toward the CLOSE ∙ If the switch is slid 䊊 position to the first detent while the moonroof is open, only the moonroof will close. The sunshade will remain open. INTERIOR LIGHTS WARNING ∙ To avoid personal injury, keep your hands, fingers and head away from the sunshade arm, the arm rail and sunshade inlet port. ∙ Do not allow children near the rear sunshade system. They could be injured. ∙ Do not place objects on or near the rear sunshade. This could cause improper operation or damage it. ∙ Do not pull or push the rear sunshade. This could cause improper operation or damage it. CAUTION ∙ Do not place objects (such as newspapers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the sunshade inlet port. Doing so may entangle these objects in the sunshade when it is extending or retracting, causing improper operation or damage to the sunshade. ∙ Do not push the sunshade arm with your hands, etc., as this may deform it. Improper operation or damage to the sunshade may result. ∙ Do not put any object into the sunshade inlet port as this may result in improper operation or damage the sunshade. ∙ Do not hang any object on the arm rail as this may result in improper operation or damage the sunshade. ∙ Do not forcefully pull the sunshade. Doing so may elongate the sunshade. Improper operation or damage to the sunshade may result. If the moonroof does not close Have your moonroof checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. LIC2302 1 is pressed, the footWhen the ON switch 䊊 well lights (if so equipped), step lights (if so equipped), map lights and rear personal lights will automatically turn on and stay on for a period of time when: ∙ The doors are unlocked by the Intelligent Key, a key or the request switch (if so equipped) while all doors are closed and the ignition switch is in the OFF position. ∙ When individually pushed. 2 is pushed, the inWhen the OFF switch 䊊 terior lights do not illuminate even when pushed. When the DOOR/OFF switch is pressed and the ON switch is pressed, all of the lights will come on. Instruments and controls 2-75 NOTE: The footwell lights and step lights illuminate when the driver and passenger doors are open regardless of the interior light switch position. These lights will turn off automatically after a period of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged. CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery. LIC2303 MAP LIGHTS The console light will turn on whenever the parking lights or headlights are illuminated. Press the button to turn the map lights on. To turn them off, press the button again. The console light brightness can be adjusted with the illumination brightness control. 2-76 Instruments and controls LIC2304 CONSOLE LIGHT CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery. The lights will turn off automatically after a period of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged. CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery. LIC1083 Rear personal lights PERSONAL LIGHTS (if so equipped) To turn the rear personal lights on, push the switch. To turn them off, push the switch again. SIC2063A ROOM LIGHT (if so equipped) The room light on the overhead trim has a three-position switch. To operate, push the switch to the desired position. 1 䊊 2 䊊 3 䊊 ON: The light is illuminated, regardless of door position. DOOR: The light illuminates when a door or the liftgate is opened. The light turns off when the door or liftgate is closed. OFF: The light does not illuminate. Instruments and controls 2-77 HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped) CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery. The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual handheld transmitters into one built-in device. HomeLink® Universal Transceiver: ∙ Will operate most radio frequency devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems. LIC3925 LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT The luggage compartment light on the overhead trim has a three-position switch. To operate, push the switch to the desired position. 1 䊊 2 䊊 OFF: The light does not illuminate regardless of door position or lock status. ON: The light is illuminated. • The light also illuminates with other interior lights when the switch is in the neutral position. 2-78 Instruments and controls ∙ Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicle’s battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink® will retain all programming. When the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional information, refer to “Programming HomeLink®” in this section. WARNING ∙ Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. For additional information, refer to “Push-button ignition switch” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death. ∙ Do not use the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death. ∙ During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close (if the transmitter is within range). Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door, gate, etc., that you are programming. PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515. NOTE: Place the ignition switch in the ON position (without starting the engine) when programming HomeLink®. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink® for quicker programming and accurate transmission of the radio frequency. LIC2365 1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from the HomeLink® surface, keeping the 1 in view. HomeLink® indicator light 䊊 Instruments and controls 2-79 NOTE: Some devices may require you to replace Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in “Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers and gate openers” in this section. 3. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light. LIC2366 2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink® button and hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT release until the 1 flashes HomeLink® indicator light 䊊 slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. (The rapid flashing indicates successful programming.) 1 is ∙ If the indicator light 䊊 solid/continuous, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and released. 1 blinks rapidly ∙ If the indicator light 䊊 for 2 seconds and then turns to a solid/continuous light, continue with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device. A second person may make the following steps easier. Use a ladder or other device. Do not stand on your vehicle to perform the next steps. 4. At the receiver located on the garage door opener motor in the garage, locate the “learn” or “smart” button (the name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer but it is usually located near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit). If there is difficulty locating the button, reference the garage door opener’s manual. 5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. NOTE: Once the button is pressed, you have approximately 30 seconds to initiate the next step. 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and hold the trained HomeLink® button for 2 seconds and release. Repeat the “press/hold/release” sequence up to three times to complete the training process. HomeLink® should now activate your rolling code equipped device. 7. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-3553515. 2-80 Instruments and controls PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE OPENERS Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during training. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “timeout” in the same manner. If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties training a gate operator or garage door opener by using the “Training” procedures, replace “Programming HomeLink®” step 2 with the following: NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, etc., unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener components. 1. For additional information, refer to “Programming HomeLink®” step 1 in this section. 2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink® button and the hand-held transmitter button. During training, your hand-held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press and hold the desired HomeLink® button while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training. DO NOT release until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid flashing indicates successful training. Proceed with “Programming HomeLink®” step 3 to complete. If the device was unplugged during the programming procedure, remember to plug it back in when programming is completed. OPERATING THE HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after it is programmed, can be used to activate the programmed device. To operate, simply press and release the appropriate programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button. The amber indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted. For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. PROGRAMMING TROUBLEDIAGNOSIS If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information: ∙ replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries. ∙ position the hand-held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink® surface. ∙ press and hold both the HomeLink® and hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption. Instruments and controls 2-81 ∙ position the hand-held transmitter 1 3 in (26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink® is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position – keeping the indicator light in view at all times. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515. CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION The following procedure clears the programmed information from both buttons. Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons can be reprogrammed. For additional information, refer to “Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button” in this section. To clear all programming: 1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink® buttons until the indicator light begins to flash in approximately 10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds. 2-82 Instruments and controls 2. Release both buttons. HomeLink® is now in the programming mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with “Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1. REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK® BUTTON To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button, complete the following: 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. DO NOT release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink® button, proceed with “Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1. For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515 (except Mexico). The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pressing the HomeLink® button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink® buttons. IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional information. When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter information. FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For Canada: This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Instruments and controls 2-83 3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Remote keyless entry (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 3-2 NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 3-3 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Locking with inside lock knob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Automatic door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped) . . . 3-8 How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Battery indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 How to use the remote keyless entry function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Type A (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Type B (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Remote Engine Start operating range . . . . . . . 3-22 Remote starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Extending engine run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Canceling a Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Conditions the Remote Engine Start will not work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Operating the manual liftgate (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Operating the power liftgate (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Motion-Activated Liftgate (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Liftgate release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 Liftgate position setting (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Opener operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Card holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 Manual anti-glare rearview mirror (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . 3-41 Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 KEYS REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (if so equipped) CAUTION Do not leave the ignition key inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle. LPD2500 1. 2. 3. Jackknife type key Integrated door lock key fob with transponder chip Key number plate A key number plate is supplied with your keys. Record the key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate. A key number is only necessary when you have lost all your keys. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated without knowing the key number. LPD2192 Storing remote keyless entry To lock or unlock the vehicle using the key 1 to unfold the press the release button 䊊 key from the fob. When storing the key press the release but1 and push key 䊊 2 to fold the key back ton 䊊 3 . into fob slot 䊊 Never leave keys in vehicle. 3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components when registering new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer. LPD2890 Type A (if so equipped) 1. 2. 3. Intelligent Key (two sets) Mechanical key Key number plate (one plate) A key number plate is supplied with your keys. Record the key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate. LPD2941 Type B (if so equipped) NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so equipped) Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelligent Key System components and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components. A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated without knowing the key number. CAUTION Never leave these keys in the vehicle. Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent Key: As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be registered prior to use with the Intelligent Key System and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle. ∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3 CAUTION ∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key. ∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object. Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key slot. ∙ Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key. For additional information, refer to “Doors” in this section. ∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry. NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS You can only drive your vehicle using the keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle. ∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C ). ∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet. ∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers. If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. SPA1951 Mechanical key A mechanical key can be used for all the locks. The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key. Never leave the keys in the vehicle. To remove the mechanical key, release the lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key. To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position. Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the driver’s door. 3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Additional or replacement keys: If you still have a key, the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your existing key can be duplicated without knowing the key number. As many as four NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to a NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase the memory of all DOORS key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the registration process, these components will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration. Any key that is not given to the dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your vehicle. CAUTION Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which contains an electrical transponder, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect system function. When the doors are locked using one of the following methods, the doors cannot be opened using the inside or outside door handles. The doors must be unlocked to open the doors. WARNING ∙ Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders. ∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets. ∙ Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5 For additional information, refer to “Security systems” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual LPD2129 Driver’s side SPA2726 Inside lock LOCKING WITH KEY LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB To lock the door using the mechanical key, turn the key toward the front of the vehicle 1 . This will only lock the corresponding 䊊 door and will not activate the security system. To arm the security system, press button on the Intelligent Key. the To unlock the corresponding door using the mechanical key, turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle. This will only unlock the corresponding door and will not dis2 . arm the security system.䊊 To lock the door without the key, move the 1 , inside lock knob to the lock position 䊊 then close the door. 3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments To unlock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the unlock position 2 . 䊊 Lockout protection When the power door lock switch is moved to the lock position with any door open and the Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle, all doors will unlock automatically and a chime will sound after the door is closed. This function helps to prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked inside the vehicle. AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS LPD2309 LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH To lock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver’s or front passen1 . When ger’s side) to the lock position 䊊 locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle. To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver’s or front pas2 . senger’s side) to the unlock position 䊊 ∙ All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h) ∙ All doors unlock automatically when the transmission is placed in the P (Park) position or when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position, depending on the option selected in the “Vehicle Settings” menu. NOTE: The Auto Door Unlock feature can be changed using the "Vehicle Settings" menu on the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. LPD2374 CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle. The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors. When the lever is in the LOCK position, the door can be opened only from the outside. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (if so equipped) WARNING ∙ Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use. ∙ The remote keyless entry key fob transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed. The FAA advises radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the remote keyless entry key fob while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight. As many as four key fobs can be used with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional key fobs, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. The key fob will not function when: ∙ The battery is discharged. ∙ The distance between the vehicle and the key fob is over 33 ft (10 m). The panic alarm will not activate when the key is in the ignition switch. It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn the interior lights on, and activate the panic alarm by using the key fob from outside the vehicle. CAUTION Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the key fob: ∙ Do not allow the key fob, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function. ∙ Do not drop the key fob. Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle before locking the doors. ∙ Do not strike the key fob sharply against another object. The key fob can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective distance depends on the conditions around the vehicle. ∙ Do not change or modify the key fob. 3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ∙ Wetting may damage the key fob. If the key fob gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry. ∙ Do not place the key fob for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C). ∙ Do not attach the key fob with a key holder that contains a magnet. ∙ Do not place the key fob near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers. If a key fob is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that key fob. This will prevent the key fob from unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. ∙ The hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn beeps once. NOTE: ∙ It has run for a period of time. An auto-relock function will operate after a full or partial unlock, when no further user action occurs. The relock will operate approximately one minute after full or partial unlock. The auto-relock function is canceled when any door is opened or the key is inserted into the ignition. LPD3019 HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 1. (lock) button 2. (unlock) button 3. (panic) button Locking doors 1. Remove the ignition key. 2. Close all the doors. 3. Press the button on the key fob. ∙ All the doors will lock. Unlocking doors 1. Press the The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a period of time. The panic alarm stops when: ∙ Any button is pressed on the key fob. Using the interior lights Press the button on the key fob once to turn on the interior lights. For additional information, refer to “Interior lights” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. Answer back horn feature button on the key fob. 2. The driver’s door will unlock and the hazard indicator lights flash once. button again within 3. Press the 60 seconds, the hazard indicator lights flash once and the remaining doors unlock. If desired, the answer back horn feature can be deactivated using the key fob. When button is deactivated and the pressed the hazard indicator flashes twice button is pressed, neiand when the ther the hazard indicator nor the horn operates. Using the panic alarm If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding button on the key fob for longer the than 0.5 seconds. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9 NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so equipped) NOTE: WARNING If you change the Answer Back Horn feature with the key fob, the vehicle information display screen will show the current mode after the ignition switch has been cycled from the OFF to the ON position. The vehicle information display screen can also be used to change the answer back horn mode. To deactivate: Press and hold the and buttons for at least two seconds. The hazard indicator lights will flash three times to confirm that the answer back horn feature has been deactivated. To activate: Press and hold the and buttons for at least two seconds once more. The hazard indicator lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated. Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered. ∙ Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use. LPD2502 BATTERY INDICATOR LIGHT Battery indicator light illuminates when you press any button. The number of blinking is different to identify each registered Intelligent Keys. If the light does not illuminate, the battery is weak or needs replacement. For additional information, refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual. 3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ∙ The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed. The FAA advises the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight. The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door locks using the remote control function or pushing the request switch on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation. Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key system. CAUTION ∙ Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle. ∙ Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle. The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio waves. Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key system under the following operating conditions: ∙ When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower, power station and broadcasting station. ∙ When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, or a CB radio. ∙ When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials. ∙ When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby. ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal computer. ∙ When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter. In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key. As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is approximately two years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one. Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent Key: CAUTION When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an indicator illuminates in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. ∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function. Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter. ∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object. For additional information, refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual. ∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key. ∙ Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key. ∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry. ∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C). Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11 If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass, handle or rear bumper, the request switches may not function. ∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet. ∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers. When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the request switch to lock/unlock the doors. If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. LPD2653 OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request 1 . switch 䊊 When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly. The operating range is within 31.5 in (80 cm) 1 . from each request switch 䊊 3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ∙ To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you and then lock the doors. ∙ Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch. The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door. LPD2554 DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAUTION ∙ Do not push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle. LPD2181 NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® OPERATION You can lock or unlock the doors without taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag. When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door handle request switch within the range of operation. ∙ After locking with the door handle request switch, verify the doors are securely locked by testing them. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13 NOTE: ∙ Request switches for all doors and the liftgate can be deactivated when the I-Key Door Lock feature is switched to OFF using the “Vehicle Settings” menu on the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. LPD2893 LPD2773 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you. 4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice and the outside chime sounds twice, unless the answer back feature is deactivated, then only the hazard lights will flash. For additional information, refer to “Answer back horn feature” in this section. Locking doors 2. Close the driver’s door and push the driver’s door request switch OR close all doors and push any door request switch while carrying the Intelligent Key with you. 3. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock. 3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ∙ Doors lock with the door handle request switch while the ignition switch is not in the LOCK position. ∙ Doors do not lock by pushing the door handle request switch while the driver’s door is open. However, doors lock with the mechanical key even if any door is open. ∙ Doors do not lock with the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you. However, when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be locked with another Intelligent Key. WARNING ∙ After locking the doors using the request switch, make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles. Failure to follow these instructions may result in inadvertently unlocking the doors, which may decrease the safety and security of your vehicle. CAUTION ∙ When locking the doors using the request switch, make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your possession before operating the request switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle. ∙ The request switch is operational only when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system. Lockout protection To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system. When the driver’s side door is open, the doors are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed; the lock will automatically unlock and the door buzzer sounds. NOTE: The doors may not lock when the Intelligent Key is in the same hand that is operating the request switch to lock the door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or your other hand. CAUTION LPD2893 The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions: ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the instrument panel. ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the glove box or a storage bin. ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the door pockets. ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed inside or near metallic materials. Unlocking doors 1. Carry the Intelligent Key. 2. Push the door handle request switch. 3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the outside chime sounds once, unless the answer back feature is deactivated, then only the hazard lights will flash. For additional information, refer to “Answer back horn feature” in this section. 4. Push the door handle request switch again within one minute to unlock all doors. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15 handle, push the door handle request switch to unlock the door. All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within one minute after pushing the request switch. ∙ Opening any door. ∙ Pushing the ignition switch. LPD2773 NOTE: Request switches for all doors and liftgate can be deactivated when the I-Key Door Lock feature is turned OFF using the “Vehicle Settings” menu on the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door. If the door does not unlock after returning the door The interior light timer illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked, the room light (if so equipped) switch is in the DOOR position and when the DOOR/OFF switch is in the OFF position. The interior light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations: ∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON position. ∙ Locking the doors with the remote control. ∙ Switching the room light (if so equipped) switch to the OFF position and the DOOR/OFF switch is in the ON position. 3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ∙ Switching the Auto Room Lamp feature to OFF using the “Vehicle Settings” menu on the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section. For additional information, refer to ”Interior lights” in the “Instrument and controls” section of this manual. HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle. The remote keyless entry function will not function under the following conditions: ∙ When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range. ∙ When the doors or the rear liftgate are open or not closed securely. ∙ When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged. CAUTION When locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle. LPD3602 TYPE A (if so equipped) 1. (remote engine start) LPD3026 TYPE B (if so equipped) 1. (remote engine start) 2. (lock) button 2. (lock) button 3. (unlock) button 3. (unlock) button 4. (panic) button 4. (liftgate) button 5. (panic) button Locking doors 1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position. 2. Close all doors. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17 3. Press the gent Key. button on the Intelli- 4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice and the horn beeps once. 5. All doors will be locked. WARNING ∙ After locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles. Failure to follow these instructions may result in inadvertently unlocking the doors, which may decrease the safety and security of your vehicle. Unlocking doors 1. Press the Key. button on the Intelligent 2. The driver’s door will unlock and the hazard indicator lights flash once. button again within 3. Press the 60 seconds, the hazard indicator lights flash once and the remaining doors unlock. NOTE: The Selective Unlock feature can be changed using the “Vehicle Settings” menu on the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within one minute after pressing button: the ∙ Opening any doors. ∙ Pushing the ignition switch. The interior light timer illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked, the room light (if so equipped) switch is in the DOOR position and when the DOOR/OFF switch is in the OFF position. The light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations: ∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON position. ∙ Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key. 3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ∙ Switching the room light (if so equipped) switch to the OFF position and the DOOR/OFF switch is in the ON position. ∙ Switching the Auto Room Lamp feature to OFF using the “Vehicle Settings” menu on the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section. For additional information, refer to ”Interior lights” in the “Instrument and controls” section of this manual. Releasing the rear liftgate (if so equipped) The rear liftgate can be opened and closed by performing the following: button for longer than ∙ Press the 1 second to open the rear liftgate. button again for longer ∙ Press the than 1 second to close the rear liftgate. button is pressed during When the the open or close process the liftgate will stop. When pressed again, the liftgate will reverse and go in the opposite direction. Using the panic alarm Answer back horn feature If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding button on the Intelligent Key for the longer than 0.5 seconds. The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a period of time. If desired, the answer back horn feature can be deactivated using the Intelligent Key. When it is deactivated and the button is pressed, the hazard indicator lights flash twice. When the button is pressed, neither the hazard indicator lights nor the horn operates. The panic alarm stops when: ∙ It has run for a period of time, or ∙ Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key. ∙ The request switch on the driver or passenger door is pushed and the Intelligent Key is in range of the door handle. Using the interior lights Press the button on the key fob once to turn on the interior lights. For additional information, refer to “Interior lights” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. NOTE: To activate: and butPress and hold the tons for at least 2 seconds once more. The hazard indicator lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated. Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered. If you change the Answer Back Horn feature with the Intelligent Key, the vehicle information display screen will show the current mode after the ignition switch has been cycled from the OFF to the ON position. The vehicle information display screen can also be used to change the answer back horn mode. To deactivate: and butPress and hold the tons for at least 2 seconds. The hazard indicator lights will flash three times to confirm that the answer back horn feature has been deactivated. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19 If the light does not blink, your battery may be too weak to communicate to the vehicle. If this occurs, the battery may need to be replaced. For additional information regarding the replacement of a battery, refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual. WARNING SIGNALS LPD2836 Intelligent Key button operation light The light blinks only when you press any button on the Intelligent Key. The light illumination only signifies that the key fob has transmitted a signal. You may look and/or listen to verify that the vehicle has performed the intended operation. The number of blinks identifies each registered key (i.e. 1 blink = 1st key,...,4 blinks = 4th key) for your own identification purposes. To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in the instrument panel. When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. For additional information, refer to the “Troubleshooting guide” in this section and “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. 3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle system may respond differently than expected. Symptom The Shift to Park warning appears on When stopping the engine the display and the inside warning chime sounds continuously. When opening the driver’s door to get The Door/liftgate Open warning apout of the vehicle pears on the display. The No Key Detected warning appears on the display, the outside chime sounds three times and the inside warning chime sounds for approximately three seconds. The Shift to Park warning appears on When closing the door after getting the display and the inside chime out of the vehicle sounds continuously. The Rear Door Alert warning message appears on the display, the horn sounds three times twice, or a Check Rear Seat for All Articles warning appears on the display. When closing the door with the inside The outside chime sounds for approxilock knob turned to the locked mately three seconds and all the position. doors unlock. When pushing the door handle reThe outside chime sounds for approxibutton quest switch or the mately three seconds. on the Intelligent Key to lock the door When pushing the ignition switch to start the engine When pushing the ignition switch The Key Battery Low warning appears on the display. The Key ID Incorrect warning appears on the display. The Key System Error warning appears on the display. Possible Cause Remedy The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. The ignition switch is in the ON position. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. The ignition switch is in the ON position. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. The ignition switch is in the ON position and the shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. The Rear Door Alert is activated. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and place the ignition switch in the OFF position. Check the rear seat for all articles, press the ENTER button to clear the Rear Door Alert warning message. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. The battery charge is low. Replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual. The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. It warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Key system. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21 REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped) Remote Engine Start to have the vehicle in view. Check local regulations for any requirements. Other conditions may affect the function of the Remote Engine Start feature. For additional information, refer to “Conditions the Remote Engine Start will not work” in this section. Other conditions can affect the performance of the Intelligent Key transmitter. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in this section. LPD2895 Type A (if so equipped) The button will be on the NISSAN Intelligent Key® if the vehicle has Remote Engine Start. This feature allows the engine to start from outside the vehicle. The following features may be affected when Remote Engine Start is used: ∙ Vehicles with a manual climate control system will default to the last used heating or cooling mode. LPD2947 Type B (if so equipped) ∙ Vehicles with an automatic climate control system may default to either heating or cooling mode, depending on outside and cabin temperatures. For additional information, refer to “Remote Engine Start with Intelligent Climate Control” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual. Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of remote starters. For example, some laws require a person using 3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments REMOTE ENGINE START OPERATING RANGE WARNING To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets. CAUTION When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or other strong radio wave sources are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly. The Remote Engine Start function can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the vehicle. The Remote Engine Start operating range is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the vehicle. REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE To use the Remote Engine Start feature perform the following: 1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle. 2. Press the doors. button to lock all 3. Within 5 seconds press and hold button until the turn signal the lights flash and the tail lamps turn on. If the vehicle is not within view press and button for at least 2 sechold the onds. The following events will occur when the engine starts: ∙ The parking lights will turn on and remain on as long as the engine is running. ∙ The doors will be locked and the climate control system may come on. ∙ The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend the time for an additional 10 minutes. For additional information, refer to “Extending engine run time” in this section. Press and hold the brake pedal while switching the ignition to the ON position before driving. For additional information, refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME The Remote Engine Start feature can be extended one time by performing the steps listed in “Remote starting the vehicle” in this section. Run time will be calculated as follows: ∙ The first 10 minute run time will start when the Remote Engine Start function is performed. ∙ The second 10 minutes will start immediately when the Remote Engine Start function is performed again. For example, if the engine has been running for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are added, the engine will run for a total of 15 minutes. ∙ Extending engine run time will bring you to the two Remote Engine Start limit. A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts, or a single Remote Engine Start with an extension, are allowed between ignition cycles. The ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position and then back to the OFF position before the Remote Engine Start procedure can be used again. CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE START To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform one of the following: ∙ Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle until the parking lights and press turn off. ∙ Turn on the hazard warning flashers. ∙ Cycle the ignition switch on and then off. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23 ∙ The extended engine run time has expired. button is not pressed and ∙ The held for at least 2 seconds. ∙ The first 10 minute timer has expired. button is not pressed and ∙ The held within 5 seconds of pressing the lock button. ∙ Opening the engine hood. ∙ Shifting the vehicle out of P (Park). ∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle. ∙ Pushing the ignition switch without the Intelligent Key in the vehicle. ∙ Not pressing the brake pedal while pressing the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key in the vehicle. CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE START WILL NOT WORK The Remote Engine Start will not operate if any of the following conditions are present: ∙ The brake is pressed. ∙ The doors are not closed and locked. ∙ The liftgate is open. ∙ The Key System Error warning message appears in the vehicle information display. ∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle. ∙ Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single Remote Engine Start with an extension, have already been used. ∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON position. ∙ The vehicle is not in P (Park). ∙ The hood is not securely closed. ∙ There is a detected registered key already inside of the vehicle. ∙ The hazard indicator lights are on. ∙ The engine is still running. The engine must be completely stopped. Wait at least 6 seconds if the engine goes from running to off. This is not applicable when extending engine run time. 3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ∙ The Remote Engine Start feature has been switched to the OFF using the “Vehicle Settings” menu on the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. The Remote Engine Start may display a warning or indicator in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. HOOD WARNING ∙ Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident. ∙ If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood. 1 1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊 located below the instrument panel until the hood springs up slightly. 2 in between the 2. Locate the lever 䊊 hood and grille and push the lever sideways with your fingertips. 3 . 3. Raise the hood 䊊 4 and insert 4. Remove the support rod 䊊 5 . it into the slot 䊊 LPD3017 A when removing Hold the coated parts 䊊 or resetting the support rod. Avoid direct contact with the metal parts, as they may be hot immediately after the engine has been stopped. When closing the hood, return the support rod to its original position, lower the hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm) above the latch and release it. This allows proper engagement of the hood latch. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25 LIFTGATE WARNING ∙ Always be sure the liftgate has been closed securely to prevent it from opening while driving. CAUTION Do not use accessory carriers that attach to the liftgate. Doing so will cause damage to the vehicle. ∙ Do not drive with the liftgate open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. ∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets. ∙ Always be sure that hands and feet are clear of the door frame to avoid injury while closing the liftgate. 3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments LPD2655 OPERATING THE MANUAL LIFTGATE (if so equipped) The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors including the liftgate simultaneously. To open the liftgate, push the liftgate A and pull up on the opener switch 䊊 handle. To close, lower and push the liftgate down securely. ∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets. LPD2212 LPD2900 OPERATING THE POWER LIFTGATE (if so equipped) WARNING ∙ Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the liftgate. Instrument panel switch NOTE: To open, close or reverse the power liftgate, the shift lever must be in P (Park). Also, the power liftgate will not operate if battery voltage is low. Power Open: The power liftgate automatically moves from the fully closed position to the fully open position in approximately five – eight seconds. The power open feature can be activated by the button on the key fob, the instrument panel switch or the liftgate open switch. A chime sounds to indicate the power open sequence has been started. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27 A is acti∙ If the liftgate open switch 䊊 vated while the cinching motor is engaged, the cinching motor will disengage and release the latch. ∙ The key fob button must be held for 1 second before the liftgate closes. LPD2656 Liftgate opener switch ∙ When the vehicle is locked, the liftgate can be opened with the instrument panel switch or key fob. ∙ The key fob button must be held for 1 second before the liftgate opens. ∙ The liftgate must be unlocked (or the key fob must be within range) to open A . with the liftgate open switch 䊊 A warning chime will sound if the shift lever is moved out of P (Park) and the vehicle is beginning to move, during a power open operation. LPD2270 Power Close: The power liftgate automatically moves from the fully open position to the secondary position. When the liftgate reaches the secondary position, the cinching motor engages and pulls the liftgate to its primary latch position. Power close takes approximately seven – ten seconds. The power close feature can be activated by the button on the key fob, the instrument panel B. A switch or the liftgate close switch 䊊 chime sounds to indicate the power close sequence has been started. 3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Stop - Reverse: During the open/close movement, the liftgate can be stopped, if the Intelligent Key, A or instrument panel or liftgate switch (䊊 B ) is pressed. The liftgate can be reversed 䊊 in the Intelligent Key, instrument panel or A or 䊊 B ) is pressed again. liftgate switch (䊊 Auto Reverse: If an obstacle is detected during power open or power close, a warning chime will sound and the liftgate will reverse direction and return to the full open or full close position. If a second obstacle is detected, the liftgate motion will stop and the liftgate will enter manual mode. A pinch strip is mounted on each side of the liftgate. If an obstacle is detected by a pinch strip during power close, the liftgate will reverse direction and return to the full open position. NOTE: To open the liftgate manually, push the liftA and raise the liftgate. gate open switch 䊊 If the pinch strip is damaged or removed, the power close function will not operate. To close, lower and push the liftgate down securely. MOTION-ACTIVATED LIFTGATE (if so equipped) WARNING There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the liftgate. The liftgate can be operated using a quick kicking motion under the center of the rear bumper. To operate, the Intelligent Key must be within 31.5 in (80 cm) of the liftgate. LPD2655 Manual Mode: If power operation is not available, the liftgate may be operated manually. Power operation may not be available under the following conditions: ∙ Multiple obstacles have been detected in a single power cycle NOTE: Tow hitches are available as an accessory for this vehicle. If a tow hitch is installed, the liftgate electronic control unit (ECU) needs to be replaced with an ECU programmed with towing logic for the Motion-Activated Liftgate to function properly. ∙ Battery voltage is low A is If the power liftgate open switch 䊊 pushed during power open or close, the power operation will be canceled and the liftgate can be operated manually. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29 LPD2762 Activation zone Proper operation technique ∙ While at the rear of the vehicle, begin making a quick forward kicking motion. ∙ Raise your foot straight under the center of the rear bumper then immediately return your foot to the ground in a continuous motion. ∙ The kicking motion should be straight, smooth and consistent. ∙ After your kick motion is complete, step back and allow the liftgate to open/close. LPD2948 DO: Quick forward kick and return while the key fob is within range ∙ Three beeps will sound and the liftgate will begin moving within two seconds after the kick. CAUTION Before performing the kicking motion, steady your stance to prevent any loss of balance. Also, while making the kicking motion, take caution around hot exhaust system parts. Otherwise, there may be danger of injury. 3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments LPD2764 DO NOT: Swing foot side to side or pause during kick WARNING Prevent unintentional liftgate opening/closing. There may be conditions when opening/closing the liftgate is not desired. Keep the Intelligent Key out of range of the liftgate, (31.5 in or 80 cm), when washing or working around the back of the vehicle. CAUTION ∙ Interference or malfunction can be caused by parking in close proximity to radio or satellite towers. ∙ Intelligent Key interference could be caused if you have your key fob stored next to your cell phone or any RFenabled smart card. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in this section. LIFTGATE RELEASE WARNING ∙ Always be sure the liftgate has been closed securely to prevent it from opening while driving. ∙ Do not drive with the liftgate open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. ∙ To avoid personal injury, do not attempt to activate the power liftgate if one or both of the liftgate struts are removed. CAUTION ∙ If the power liftgate does not stay open or if the liftgate unexpectedly closes at any time while a continuous warning chime sounds, do not operate the liftgate. There may be a pressure loss in one or both of the liftgate struts. It is recommended that you have the liftgate inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ Do not activate the power liftgate if one or both of the liftgate struts are removed. Damage to the liftgate or power liftgate mechanisms may occur. LPD2375 Manual liftgate release (if so equipped) The liftgate release mechanism allows the liftgate to be opened in the event of a discharged battery. To release the liftgate from the inside of the vehicle, perform the following operations: 1. Fold the rear seats down. For additional information, refer to “Folding the rear bench seat” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31 2. Insert a suitable tool in the lower access opening hole. Move the release lever to the right. The liftgate will be unlatched. 2. Insert a suitable tool in the top access opening hole. Move the release lever to the right. The liftgate will be unlatched. 3. Push the liftgate up to open. 3. Push the liftgate up to open. NOTE: NOTE: If you had to open the liftgate using this lever, it is recommended that you have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. If you had to open the liftgate using this lever, it is recommended that you have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. LPD2949 Power liftgate release (if so equipped) The liftgate release mechanism allows the liftgate to be opened in the event of a discharged battery. To release the liftgate from the inside of the vehicle, perform the following operations: 1. Fold the rear seats down. For additional information, refer to “Folding the rear bench seat” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual. 3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments FUEL-FILLER DOOR 3. While holding the liftgate in position, B push and hold the liftgate switch 䊊 located on the liftgate for approximately 5 seconds or until two beeps are heard. The liftgate will open to the selected position setting. To change the position of the liftgate, repeat steps 1-3 for setting the position of the liftgate. LPD2615 LIFTGATE POSITION SETTING (if so equipped) The liftgate can be set to open to a specific height by performing the following: 1. Open the liftgate using the request switch or the Intelligent Key. LPD3030 OPENER OPERATION The fuel-filler door opener switch is located on the instrument panel. To open, push the fuel-filler opener switch. To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely. 2. Pull the liftgate down to the desired position and hold the liftgate (the liftgate will have some resistance when being manually adjusted). Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33 FUEL-FILLER CAP WARNING ∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling. ∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers: – Always place the container on the ground when filling. – Do not use electronic devices when filling. ∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. ∙ Use only an original equipment type fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could Malfunction Indialso cause the cator Light (MIL) to come on. – Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are filling it. – Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid. CAUTION ∙ Do not use a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. ∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle. 3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ∙ The Loose Fuel Cap warning message will be displayed/warning will appear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly tightened. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly after the Loose Fuel Cap warning message is displayed/warning appears may Malfunction Indicator cause the Light (MIL) to illuminate. ∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap Malproperly may cause the function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumilight illuminates benate. If the cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. light should turn off after a The few driving trips. If the light does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ For additional information, refer to “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. ∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage. NOTE: Changing ignition switch status during the refueling process may cause a delay in fuel gauge response. LPD2186 To remove the fuel-filler cap: LPD3016 Loose Fuel Cap warning 1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to remove. 2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder 1 while refueling. 䊊 To install the fuel-filler cap: 1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-filler tube. 2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a single click is heard. The Loose Fuel Cap warning message will be displayed in the vehicle information display when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed. To turn off the warning message, perform the following: 1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soon as possible. For additional information, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in this section. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35 STEERING WHEEL 2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until a single click is heard. 3. Press the OK button on the steering wheel for about one second to turn off the Loose Fuel Cap warning message after tightening the fuel-filler cap. WARNING ∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. ∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driver’s air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts. LPD2648 MANUAL OPERATION Tilt and telescopic operation 1 down: Pull the lock lever 䊊 ∙ Adjust the steering wheel up or down in 2 to the desired position. direction 䊊 ∙ Adjust the steering wheel forward or 3 to the desired backward in direction 䊊 position. 1 up firmly to lock the Push the lock lever 䊊 steering wheel in place. 3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments SUN VISORS 1. To block glare from the front, swing 1 . down the sun visor 䊊 2. To block glare from the side, remove the sun visor from the center mount 2 . and swing the visor to the side 䊊 3 in or 3. To extend the sun visor, slide 䊊 out as needed. CAUTION ∙ Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original position. ∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor forcedly downward. LPD2067 VANITY MIRRORS To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity mirrors will illuminate when the mirror cover is open. WPD0344 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37 MIRRORS AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims during night time conditions and according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare feature is activated when the ignition switch is in the ON position. NOTE: LPD2598 Driver’s side WPD0126 CARD HOLDER MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) To access the card holder, slide card in the card holder. Do not view information while operating the vehicle. 1 to reduce glare Use the night position 䊊 from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night. 2 when driving in Use the day position 䊊 daylight hours. WARNING Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity. 3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Do not hang any objects over the sen1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors 䊊 sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors, resulting in improper operation. LPD2418 Type A (if so equipped) Type A (if so equipped) The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims during night time conditions and according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare feature is activated when the ignition switch is in the ON position. LPD0469 Type B— Without compass (if so equipped) Type B and Type C (if so equipped) 2 will illuminate when the The indicator light 䊊 automatic anti-glare feature is operating. To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press: ∙ The O button for inside mirrors without compass, and the indicator light will turn off. button for inside mirrors ∙ The with compass, and the indicator light will turn off. LPD2419 Type C— With compass (if so equipped) To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature, press: ∙ The I button for inside mirrors without compass, and the indicator light will turn on. button for inside mirrors ∙ The with compass, and the indicator light will turn on. For additional information on HomeLink® Universal Transceiver operation, refer to the “HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-39 3 For information on the compass display 䊊 (if so equipped), refer to “Compass display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. WARNING ∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects. ∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. LPD2452 OUTSIDE MIRRORS The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position. 1 to select the left Move the small switch 䊊 or right mirror. Adjust each mirror to the 2 . desired position using the large switch 䊊 1 to the center (neutral) Move the switch 䊊 position to prevent accidentally moving the mirror. 3-40 Pre-driving checks and adjustments AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so equipped) The outside mirror surfaces will return to their original position when one of the following conditions has occurred: ∙ The shift lever is moved to any position other than R (Reverse). The automatic drive positioner system has two features: ∙ Memory storage function ∙ Entry/exit function ∙ The outside mirror control switch is set to the neutral or center position. ∙ The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. NOTE: Manual folding outside mirrors If the outside mirror control switch is in the “center” position, the mirror surface will NOT turn downward when the shift lever is moved to R (Reverse). Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it. For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in this section. Reverse tilt-down feature (if so equipped) Heated mirrors (if so equipped) LPD2084 The reverse tilt-down feature will turn both outside mirror surfaces downward to provide better rear visibility close to the vehicle when the mirror control switch is in either the L or R position. Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For additional information, refer to “Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. The mirrors automatically return to their original position when you shift out of R (Reverse). Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-41 and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual and “Outside mirrors” in this section. 2. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch (1 or 2). The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and stay on for approximately 5 seconds. The chime will sound when the memory is stored. NOTE: LPD2531 MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION Two positions for the driver’s seat and outside mirrors can be stored in the automatic drive positioner memory. Follow these procedures to use the memory system. NOTE: The vehicle should be stopped while setting the memory. 1. Adjust the driver’s seat and outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch. For additional information, refer to “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts If a new memory position is stored in the same memory switch, the previous memory position will be overwritten by the new stored position. Confirming memory storage ∙ Push the SET switch. ∙ If a memory position has not been stored in the switch (1 or 2) the indicator light for the respective switch will come ON for approximately 0.5 seconds. ∙ If a memory position has been stored in the switch (1 or 2) then the indicator light for the respective switch will stay ON for approximately 5 seconds. 3-42 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Linking a key fob to a stored memory position Each key fob can be linked to a stored memory position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the following procedure. 1. Follow steps 1 and 2 in the “Memory storage function” section for storing the memory position. 2. While the indicator light is on, press button on the key fob. The the indicator light of the linked memory switch will blink. After the indicator light goes off, the key fob is linked to that memory setting. Once it is linked, when ignition switch is placed in the OFF position, pressing button on the key fob will move the the driver’s seat and outside mirrors to the linked memory switch position. NOTE: If a new memory position is stored in the linked memory switch, then the key fob will link the new position and overwrites the previous position. ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION SYSTEM OPERATION This system is designed so that the driver’s seat will automatically move when the shift lever is in the P (Park) position. This allows the driver to easily get in and out of the seat. The automatic drive positioner system will not work or will stop operating under the following conditions: The driver’s seat will slide backward when the ignition is switched to OFF and the driver’s door is opened. The driver’s seat will return to the previous position when the ignition is switched to ON. The entry/exit function can be enabled or disabled through “Vehicle Settings” in the vehicle information display by performing the following: ∙ Switch the “Exit Seat Slide” from ON to OFF. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. ∙ When the vehicle speed is above 4 mph (7 km/h). ∙ When any of the memory switches are pushed while the automatic drive positioner is operating. ∙ When the switch for the driver’s seat and steering column is pushed while the automatic drive positioner is operating. ∙ When the seat has already been moved to the memorized position. ∙ When no seat position is stored in the memory switch. ∙ When the shift lever is moved from P (Park) to any other position. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-43 4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 RearView Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 How to read the displayed lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Difference between predicted and actual distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 How to park with predicted course lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 How to turn on and off predicted course lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . . 4-9 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Intelligent Around View Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11 Intelligent Around View Monitor system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Difference between predicted and actual distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 How to park with predicted course lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 How to switch the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Intelligent Around View Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Moving Object Detection (MOD) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 MOD system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Turning MOD on and off (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-26 MOD system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Vents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Heater and air conditioner (manual) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 Heater and air conditioner (automatic) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 USB/iPod® charging port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 iPod®/iPhone®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 NISSANCONNECT® OWNER’S MANUAL Refer to the NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual that includes the following information. ∙ NissanConnect® equipped) Services (if so ∙ Navigation system (if so equipped) ∙ Audio system ∙ Apple CarPlay® ∙ Android AutoTM ∙ Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system ∙ Viewing information ∙ Other settings ∙ Voice recognition ∙ General system information 4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped) LHA4694 1. CAMERA button Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3 WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RearView Monitor system could result in serious injury or death. ∙ RearView Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and look out the windows and check mirrors to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always back up slowly. CAUTION Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera. The RearView Monitor system automatically shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position. While in R (Reverse), pressing the CAMERA button will cycle through guideline options. The radio can still be heard while the RearView Monitor is active. ∙ The system is designed as an aid to the driver in showing large stationary objects directly behind the vehicle, to help avoid damaging the vehicle. ∙ The distance guide line and the vehicle width line should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects. 4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA3694 To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor system uses a camera located just 1 . above the vehicle’s license plate 䊊 REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION With the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the RearView Monitor. 4 Vehicle width guide lines 䊊 Indicate the vehicle width when backing up. as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle. 5 Predicted course lines 䊊 LHA4805 HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with referA are disence to the vehicle body line 䊊 played on the monitor. Distance guide lines Indicate distances from the vehicle body. 1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) ∙ Red line 䊊 2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m) ∙ Yellow line 䊊 3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m) ∙ Green line 䊊 Indicate the predicted course when backing up. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position. The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course. DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5 LHA4993 LHA4994 Backing up on a steep uphill Backing up on a steep downhill When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor. When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor. 4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA4995 Backing up near a projecting object A do not touch The predicted course lines 䊊 the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course. A object when backing up to the position 䊊 if the object projects over the actual backing up course. HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES WARNING ∙ If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. ∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line. ∙ If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures: LHA4996 Backing up behind a projecting object C is shown farther than the The position 䊊 B in the display. However, the poposition 䊊 C is actually at the same distance as sition 䊊 A . The vehicle may hit the the position 䊊 – Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock while the engine is running. LHA5043 – Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes. 1. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle. ∙ When the steering wheel is turned with the ignition switch in the ACC position, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. 2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed A when the shift lever is on the screen 䊊 moved to the R (Reverse) position. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7 4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make D parallel the vehicle width guide lines 䊊 C while referring to the parking space 䊊 to the predicted course lines. 5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake. LHA3522 ADJUSTING THE SCREEN 1. While on the main menu screen, touch the “Settings” key. 2. Use the arrow to tab to the next screen and touch the “Camera” key. LHA4770 3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the preB enter the parkdicted course lines 䊊 C . ing space 䊊 4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 3. Touch the “Display Settings” key. 4. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”, “Color”, or “Black Level” key. 5. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “–” key on the touch-screen display. NOTE: Do not adjust any of the display settings of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied. HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF PREDICTED COURSE LINES To toggle on and off the predicted course lines while in the P (Park) position: 1. Press the CAMERA button. 2. Touch the “Predicted Course Lines” key to turn the feature on or off. To toggle on and off the predicted course lines or center guide line while in the R (Reverse) position, press the CAMERA button. REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. ∙ The system cannot completely eliminate blind spots and may not show every object. ∙ Do not put anything on the rearview camera. The rearview camera is installed above the license plate. ∙ Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper cannot be viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limitation. The system will not show small objects below the bumper, and may not show objects close to the bumper or on the ground. ∙ When washing the vehicle with high pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the camera. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock. ∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used. ∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors. ∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference. The lines are highly affected by the number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road conditions and road grade. ∙ Make sure that the liftgate is securely closed when backing up. ∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock. The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction: ∙ When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not clearly display objects. ∙ When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly. ∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper. ∙ The screen may flicker under fluorescent light. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9 ∙ The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects. If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the 1 , the RearView Monitor may not camera 䊊 display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth. ∙ Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark environment. ∙ There may be a delay when switching between views. ∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the camera, the RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera. ∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth. LHA3694 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE CAUTION ∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration. ∙ Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected. 4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR (if so equipped) LHA4694 1. CAMERA button Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11 WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for the proper use of the Intelligent Around View Monitor system could result in serious injury or death ∙ The Intelligent Around View Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation because it has areas where objects cannot be viewed. The four corners of the vehicle in particular, are areas where objects do not always appear in the bird’s-eye, front, or rear views. Always check your surroundings to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always operate the vehicle slowly. ∙ The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers. CAUTION Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera. The Intelligent Around View Monitor system is designed as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot parking or parallel parking. The monitor displays various views of the position of the vehicle in a split screen format. Not all views are available at all times. Available views: ∙ Front View An approximately 150–degree view of the front of the vehicle. ∙ Rear View An approximately 150–degree view of the rear of the vehicle. ∙ Bird’s-Eye View The surrounding views of the vehicle from above. ∙ Front-Side View The view around and ahead of the front passenger’s side wheel. ∙ Rear-Wide View An approximately 180–degree view of the rear of the vehicle. 4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA3700 To display the multiple views, the Intelligent Around View Monitor system uses cameras located in the front grille, on the vehicle’s outside mirrors and one just above 1 . the vehicle’s license plate 䊊 INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION With the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position or press the CAMERA button to operate the Intelligent Around View Monitor. The screen displayed on the Intelligent Around View Monitor will automatically return to the previous screen 3 minutes after the CAMERA button has been pressed with the shift lever in a position other than the R (Reverse) position. Available views WARNING ∙ The distance guide lines and the vehicle width lines should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a paved, level surface. The apparent distance viewed on the monitor may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects. ∙ Use the displayed lines and the bird’seye view as a reference. The lines and the bird’s-eye view are greatly affected by the number of occupants, cargo, fuel level, vehicle position, road condition and road grade. ∙ If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines and the bird’s-eye view may be displayed incorrectly. ∙ When driving the vehicle up a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are further than they appear. When driving the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are closer than they appear. ∙ Objects in the rear view will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the monitor and outside mirrors. ∙ Use the mirrors or actually look to properly judge distances to other objects. ∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course lines and the actual course line. ∙ The vehicle width and predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course. ∙ The displayed lines will appear slightly off to the right, because the rearview camera is not installed in the rear center of the vehicle. SAA1840 Front view Front and rear view Guiding lines that indicate the approximate vehicle width and distance to objects with A are reference to the vehicle body line 䊊 displayed on the monitor. Distance guide lines: Indicate distances from the vehicle body: 1 : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m) ∙ Red line 䊊 2 : approximately 3 ft (1 m) ∙ Yellow line 䊊 3 : approximately 7 ft (2 m) ∙ Green line 䊊 4 : approximately 10 ft (3 m) ∙ Green line 䊊 (if so equipped) Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13 The front view will not be displayed when the vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h). NOTE: When the monitor displays the front view and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the straightahead position, both the right and left 6 are displayed. predicted course lines 䊊 When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, a line is displayed only on the opposite side of the turn. LHA4992 LHA4534 Rear view 5 : Vehicle width guide lines 䊊 Front view Bird’s-eye view Indicate the approximate vehicle width when backing up. The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle position and the predicted course to a parking space. 6 : Predicted course lines 䊊 Indicate the predicted course when operating the vehicle. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position. 4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 1 shows the position of The vehicle icon 䊊 the vehicle. Note that the apparent distance between objects viewed in the bird’seye view may differ somewhat from the actual distance to the vehicle. The areas that the cameras cannot cover 2 are indicated in black. 䊊 4 indicate the prePredicted course lines 䊊 dicted course when operating the vehicle. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the neutral position. LHA4535 Rear view 2 is highlighted in The non-viewable area 䊊 yellow for several seconds after the bird’seye view is displayed. It will be shown only the first time after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. In addition, the non-viewable corners are displayed in red and blink for the first 3 sec3 to remind the driver to be cauonds 䊊 tious. When the monitor displays the front view and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the neutral position, the two green predicted course lines are shown in front of the vehicle. When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, one green predicted course line is shown in front of the vehicle and the other predicted course line is shown at the side of the vehicle. WARNING ∙ Objects in the bird’s-eye view will appear further than the actual distance. ∙ Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle, may be misaligned or not displayed at the seam of the views. ∙ Objects that are above the camera cannot be displayed. ∙ The view of the bird’s-eye view may be misaligned when the camera position alters. ∙ A line on the ground may be misaligned and is not seen as being straight at the seam of the views. The misalignment will increase as the line proceeds away from the vehicle. When the monitor displays the rear view, the predicted course lines are shown at the back of the vehicle. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15 4 Vehicle width guide lines 䊊 Indicate the vehicle width when backing up. DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES LHA4819 LHA2652 Front-side view Guiding lines Guiding lines that indicate the approximate width and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on the monitor. 1 shows the front The front-of-vehicle line 䊊 part of the vehicle. 2 shows the apThe side-of-vehicle line 䊊 proximate vehicle width including the outside mirrors. 3 of both the front 䊊 1 and The extensions 䊊 2 lines are shown with a green dotted side 䊊 line. Rear-wide view Rear-wide view The rear-wide view shows a wider area on the entire screen and allows the checking of the blind corners on right and left sides. The rear-wide view displays an approximately 180-degree area. Distance guide lines Indicates distances from the vehicle body: 1 : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m) ∙ Red line 䊊 2 : approximately 3 ft (1 m) ∙ Yellow line 䊊 3 : approximately 7 ft (2 m) ∙ Green line 䊊 4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle. LHA4993 LHA4994 Backing up on a steep uphill Backing up on a steep downhill When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor. When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor. LHA4995 Backing up near a projecting object A do not touch The predicted course lines 䊊 the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17 A object when backing up to the position 䊊 if the object projects over the actual backing up course. HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES WARNING ∙ If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. ∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line. ∙ If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures: LHA4996 Backing up behind a projecting object C is shown farther than the The position 䊊 B in the display. However, the poposition 䊊 C is actually at the same distance as sition 䊊 A . The vehicle may hit the the position 䊊 – Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock while the engine is running. LHA5043 – Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes. 1. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle. ∙ When the steering wheel is turned with the ignition switch in the ACC position, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. 2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed A when the shift lever is on the screen 䊊 moved to the R (Reverse) position. 4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make D parallel the vehicle width guide lines 䊊 C while referring to the parking space 䊊 to the predicted course lines. 5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake. HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY With the ignition switch in the ON position, press the CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the Intelligent Around View Monitor. If the shift lever is in the P (Park) or D (Drive) position, the available views are: ∙ Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen ∙ Front view/front-side view split screen The display will switch from the Intelligent Around View Monitor screen when: ∙ The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and the vehicle speed increases above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) ∙ A different screen is selected. The Intelligent Around View Monitor displays different split screen views depending on the position of the shift lever. Press the CAMERA button to switch between the available views. If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, the available views are: LHA4770 3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the preB enter the parkdicted course lines 䊊 C . ing space 䊊 ∙ Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen ∙ Rear view/front-side view split screen ∙ Rear-wide view Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19 NOTE: Do not adjust any of the display settings of the Intelligent Around View Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied. LHA5047 ADJUSTING THE SCREEN 1. While on the main menu screen, touch the “Settings” key. 2. Use the arrow to tab to the next screen and touch the “Camera” key. 3. Touch the “Display Settings” key. 4. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”, “Color”, or “Black Level” key. 5. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “–” key on the touch-screen display. 4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA3750 INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for Intelligent Around View Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. ∙ Do not use the Intelligent Around View Monitor with the outside mirrors in the stored position, and make sure that the liftgate is securely closed when operating the vehicle using the Intelligent Around View Monitor. ∙ The apparent distance between objects viewed on the Intelligent Around View Monitor differs from the actual distance. ∙ The cameras are installed on the front grille, the outside mirrors and above the rear license plate. Do not put anything such as a license plate frame on the vehicle that covers or blocks the view of the cameras. ∙ When washing the vehicle with high pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the cameras. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock. ∙ Do not strike the cameras. They are precision instruments. Doing so could cause a malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock. There are some areas where the system will not show objects and the system does not warn of moving objects. When in the front or rear view display, an object below the bumper or on the ground may not be 1 . When in the bird’s-eye view, a tall viewed 䊊 2 of the camera object near the seam 䊊 viewing areas will not appear in the monitor. The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction: ∙ The colors of objects on the Intelligent Around View Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects. ∙ Objects on the Intelligent Around View Monitor may not be clear and the color of the object may differ in a dark environment. ∙ There may be differences in sharpness between each camera view of the bird’s-eye view. ∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that has been dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth. ∙ There may be a delay when switching between views. ∙ When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly. ∙ When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly. ∙ The screen may flicker under fluorescent light. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21 LHA3591 System temporarily unavailable When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen, there are abnormal conditions in the Intelligent Around View Monitor. This will not hinder normal driving operation but the system should be inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. LHA3592 When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the screen, the camera image may be receiving temporary electronic disturbances from surrounding devices. This will not hinder normal driving operation but the system should be inspected if it occurs frequently. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. 4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA3700 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE CAUTION ∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration. ∙ Do not damage the cameras as the monitor screen may be adversely affected. If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of 1 , the Intelligent Around View the cameras 䊊 Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth. MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD) (if so equipped) LHA4694 1. CAMERA button Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23 WARNING MOD SYSTEM OPERATION Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Moving Object Detection (MOD) system could result in serious injury or death The MOD system will turn on automatically under the following conditions: ∙ The MOD system is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation and is not designed to prevent contact with objects surrounding the vehicle. When maneuvering, always use the outside mirrors and rearview mirror and turn and check the surroundings to ensure it is safe to maneuver. ∙ When the CAMERA button is pressed to activate the camera view on the display. ∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position. ∙ When vehicle speed decreases below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and the camera screen is displayed. ∙ The system is deactivated at speeds above 5 mph (8 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. ∙ The MOD system is not designed to detect surrounding stationary objects. The MOD system can inform the driver of moving objects near the vehicle when backing out of garages, maneuvering in parking lots and in other such instances. The MOD system detects moving objects by using image processing technology on the image shown in the display. 4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA4190 Front and bird’s-eye views The MOD system operates in the following conditions when the camera view is displayed: ∙ When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position and the vehicle is stopped, the MOD system detects moving objects in the bird’s-eye view. The MOD system will not operate if the outside mirrors are moving in or out, in the stowed position, or if either front door is opened. LHA5171 Rear and bird’s-eye views ∙ When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MOD system detects moving objects in the front view. ∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MOD system detects moving objects in the rear view. The MOD system will not operate if the liftgate is open. LHA4997 Rear and front-side views The MOD system does not detect moving objects in the front-side view. The MOD icon is not displayed on the screen when in this view. When the MOD system detects moving objects near the vehicle, a chime will be heard when in front or rear view and a yellow frame will be displayed on the view where the objects are detected. While the MOD system continues to detect moving objects, the yellow frame continues to be displayed. LHA4998 Rear-wide view NOTE: While the RCTA chime (if so equipped) is beeping, the MOD system does not chime. 1 is In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame 䊊 displayed on each camera image (front, rear, right, left) depending on where moving objects are detected. 2 is displayed on each The yellow frame 䊊 view in the front view and rear view modes. 3 is displayed in the view A blue MOD icon 䊊 where the MOD system is operative. A gray Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25 MOD icon is displayed in the view where the MOD system is not operative. If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD 3 is not displayed. icon 䊊 TURNING MOD ON AND OFF (if so equipped) Some vehicles include the option to allow the MOD system to be turned on or off. To turn the MOD system on or off: or button on the 1. Press the steering wheel and select “Settings” in the vehicle information display. buttons, select “Driver 2. Using the Assistance” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Parking Aids”. 4. Toggle ON or OFF “Moving Object” using the OK button. MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. ∙ Do not use the MOD system when towing a trailer. The system may not function properly. ∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume or open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard. ∙ The MOD system performance will be limited according to environmental conditions and surrounding objects such as: – When there is low contrast between background and the moving objects. – When there is a blinking source of light. – When strong light such as another vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is present. 4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems – When camera orientation is not in its usual position, such as when a mirror is folded. – When there is dirt, water drops or snow on the camera lens. – When the position of the moving objects in the display is not changed. ∙ The MOD system might detect flowing water droplets on the camera lens, white smoke from the muffler, moving shadows, etc. ∙ The MOD system may not function properly depending on the speed, direction, distance or shape of the moving objects. ∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to the parts where the camera is installed, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered and the MOD system may not detect objects properly. ∙ When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly. This is not a malfunction. NOTE: If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of 1 , the MOD system may not the cameras 䊊 operate properly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth. The blue MOD icon will change to orange if one of the following has occurred: ∙ When the system is malfunctioning. ∙ When the component temperature reaches a high level (icon will blink). ∙ When the RearView camera has detected a blockage (icon will blink). If the icon light continues to illuminate orange, have the MOD system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. LHA3700 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE CAUTION ∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration. ∙ Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27 VENTS LHA4301 Side Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent slides. LHA4302 Center Open or close the vents by using the dial. to open the Move the dial toward the vents or toward the to close them. 4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA1134 Rear HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (manual) (if so equipped) WARNING ∙ The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. ∙ Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. ∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. LHA2243 1. Fan speed control dial / A/C (air conditioner) button 4. 5. 2. Air flow control buttons 3. Temperature control dial / MAX A/C button 6. Air recirculation button Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch Front windshield defrost button NOTE: ∙ Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents. ∙ When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29 CONTROLS Fan speed control dial The fan speed control dial allows you to adjust the fan speed for the outlet air fan flow. To turn the fan off, turn the speed control dial to the OFF position. Air flow control buttons The air flow control buttons allow you to select the air flow outlets. MAX — Air flows mainly from center A/C and side vents with maximum cooling and turns on. — Air flows mainly from center and side vents. — Air flows mainly from center and side vents and foot outlets. — Air flows mainly from foot outlets and partly from defroster. — Air flows mainly from defroster outlets and foot outlets. — Air flows mainly from defroster outlets. Temperature control dial The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the dial to the right. Air recirculation button On position (Indicator light on): Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the when: button to the ON position ∙ driving on a dusty road. ∙ to prevent traffic fumes from entering passenger compartment. ∙ for maximum cooling when using the air conditioner. Off position (Indicator light off): Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment and distributed through the selected outlet. Use the off position for normal heater or air conditioner operation. A/C (air conditioner) button Start the engine, turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position and button to turn on the air press the conditioner. The indicator light comes on 4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems when the air conditioner is operating. To turn off the air conditioner, press the button again. The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch For additional information, refer to “Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. HEATER OPERATION Heating This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost outlets and the side vent outlets. button to change to 1. Press the indicafresh air intake mode. The tor light will turn off for normal heating. 2. Press the air flow control button. 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position. 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position. Ventilation This mode directs outside air to the side and center vents. button to change to 1. Press the indicafresh air intake mode. The tor light will turn off. 2. Press the air flow control button. 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position. 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position. Defrosting or defogging This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to defrost/defog the windows. 1. Press the defroster button. 2. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position. 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position. ∙ To quickly remove ice or fog from the windows, turn the fan speed control dial to the highest setting and the temperature control to the full HOT position. position is selected, the ∙ When the air conditioner automatically turns on if the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. indicator automatically turns The off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance. The recirculation mode cannot be actiposition. vated in the Bi-level heating The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side and center vents and to the front and rear floor outlets. button to change to 1. Press the will fresh air intake mode. The turn off. 2. Press the air flow control button. 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position. 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position. Heating and defogging This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield. 1. Press the air flow control button. 2. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position. 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position. position is selected, the ∙ When the air conditioner automatically turns on if the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. indicator automatically turns The off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance. Operating tips Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield. This improves heater operation. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31 AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION Start the engine, turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position, and button to activate the air press the conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions are added to the heater operation. The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. Cooling This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air. 1. Press the air flow control button. 2. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position. 3. Press the button. 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position. ∙ For quick cooling, press the MAX A/C button. When the MAX A/C button is mode. pressed, it will activate the The amount of air coming through the vents is the highest it can go when in MAX A/C mode regardless of the posifan speed control dial. tion of the Dehumidified heating This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air. 1. Press the tion. button to the OFF posi- 2. Press the air flow control button. 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position. 4. Press the A/C (air conditioner) button. The indicator light comes on. 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position. Dehumidified defogging This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify the air. 1. Press the air flow control button. 2. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position. 4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems or are selected, ∙ When the the air conditioner automatically turns on (the indicator light may or may not illuminate) if the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windmode automatically shield. The turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance. ∙ The air conditioner is always on in or mode, regardless of whether the indicator light is on or off. 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position. Operating tips ∙ Keep the windows and moonroof (if so equipped) closed while the air conditioner is in operation. ∙ After parking in the sun, drive for two or three minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, close the windows. This allows the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly. ∙ The air conditioning system should be operated for approximately 10 minutes at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication. ∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction. AIR FLOW CHARTS The following charts show the button and dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating, cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation indicator should always be in the OFF position for heating and defrosting. ∙ If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, turn the air conditioner off. For additional information, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. ∙ If the engine coolant temperature bewill be activated comes too high, and the indicator light will come on automatically. ∙ When the ignition is OFF, button characters will not illuminate. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33 LHA4364 4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA4365 LHA4366 LHA4367 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35 LHA4685 4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (automatic) (if so equipped) 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch Fresh air intake button AUTO (automatic mode) button Fan speed control buttons Air recirculation button WARNING ∙ The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. LHA2875 1. 2. 3. 4. Front defroster button Temperature control dial (driver’s side) / ON-OFF button MODE (manual air flow control) button Display screen 5. 6. A/C (air conditioner) button Temperature control dial (passenger’s side)/DUAL (passenger’s side temperature control) button ∙ Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. ∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37 NOTE: ∙ Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents. ∙ When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO) This mode may be used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution, air intake control and fan speed are also controlled automatically. 1. Press the AUTO button on. The indicator on the button will illuminate. 2. Turn the temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature. ∙ The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution, air intake control and fan speed are also controlled automatically. ∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction. 3. You can individually set driver’s and front passenger’s side temperature using each temperature control dial. When the DUAL button is pressed or passenger’s side temperature dial is turned, the DUAL indicator will come on. To turn off the passenger’s side temperature control, press the DUAL button. Heating (A/C OFF) The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode. 1. Press the AUTO button. 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature. 4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ∙ The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically. ∙ Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise, the system may not work properly. ∙ Not recommended if windows fog up. Dehumidified defrosting or defogging front defroster button 1. Press the on. The indicator light on the button will come on. 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the maximum temperature to aid in defrosting or defogging. ∙ To quickly remove ice from the outside fan speed of the windows, use the control button to set the fan speed to maximum. ∙ As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, press the AUTO button to return to the automatic mode. ∙ When the front defroster button is pressed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 36°F (2°C). The air recirculate mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance. When the air recirculate mode automatically turns off, the air fresh mode will automatically turn on. Remote Engine Start with Intelligent Climate Control (if so equipped) Vehicles equipped with automatic climate controls and Remote Engine Start function may go into automatic heating or cooling mode when Remote Engine Start is activated depending on outside and cabin temperatures. During this period, the climate control display and buttons will be inoperable until the ignition switch is turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrosting mode, the rear window defroster and heated steering wheel (if so equipped) may be activated automatically. Voice Recognition logic (if so equipped) Air recirculation Press the fan speed control buttons to manually control the fan speed. Press the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed. Press the air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. button will The indicator light on the come on. The air recirculation cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode. When the outside temperature exceeds 70°F (21°C), the air conditioning system may default to air recirculation mode automatically to reduce overall power consumption. To exit air recirculation mode, select the fresh air intake button to enter fresh air mode. Temperature control dial Fresh air intake The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the dial to the right. Temperature can be adjusted on the driver’s and passenger’s side. Press the fresh air intake button to draw outside air into the passenger compartment. When the climate control system is on, the fan speed may be automatically lowered so that commands are more easily recognized. Fan speed can be adjusted using fan speed control buttons, if dethe sired. MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control Automatic intake air control In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be controlled automatically. When the outside temperature exceeds 70°F (21°C), the air conditioning system may default to air recirculation mode automatically to reduce overall power consumption. To exit air recirculation mode, select the fresh air intake button to enter fresh air mode. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39 To manually control the intake air, press air recirculation button the fresh air intake button. To return to or the automatic control mode if fresh air indicator is illuminated, the fresh air intake press and hold the button for about 2 seconds. The fresh air indicator and air recirculation indicator lights will flash twice, and then the intake air will be controlled automatically. To return to the automatic control mode if air recirculation icon is illumithe air recircunated, press and hold the lation button for about 2 seconds. air recirculation indicator The fresh air intake indicator lights and will flash twice and the intake air will be controlled automatically. A/C (air conditioner) button fan speed Start the engine, press the control buttons to the desired position and button to turn on the air press the conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner, button again. press the The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. Air flow control Pressing the MODE button manually controls air flow and selects the air outlet: — Air flows mainly from center and side vents. — Air flows mainly from center and side vents and foot outlets. — Air flows mainly from foot outlets and partly from defroster. — Air flows mainly from defroster and foot outlets. To turn system off Press the OFF button. Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch For additional information, refer to “Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. 4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA2949 OPERATING TIPS The sunload sensor, located on the top and center of the instrument panel, helps the system maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around this sensor. SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER ∙ When the climate system is in automatic operation and the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow outlet may default to defroster mode for a maximum of 2 minutes 30 seconds. This is not a malfunction. After the engine coolant temperature warms up, the air flow outlet will return to foot mode and operation will continue normally. ∙ When the outside and interior cabin temperatures are moderate to high, the intake setting may default to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. You may notice air flow from the foot mode, bi-level mode, or side demist vent outlets for a maximum of 15 seconds. This may occur when previous climate setting was system off. This is not a malfunction. After the initial warm air is expelled, the intake will return to automatic control, air flow outlet will return to previous settings, and operation will continue normally. To exit, press any climate control button. ∙ If you feel that the air flow mode you have selected and the outlets the air is coming out do not match, select mode. the ∙ When you change the air flow mode, you may feel air flow from the foot outlets for just a moment. This is not a malfunction. The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind. This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s ozone layer. Special charging equipment and lubricant is required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system. For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to service your “environmentally friendly” air conditioner system. WARNING The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with proper equipment. ∙ Keep the moonroof (if so equipped) closed while the air conditioner is in operation. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41 USB/iPod® CHARGING PORT ANTENNA CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO The vehicle is equipped with a shark fin antenna. When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts. WARNING LHA4476 ∙ A cellular phone should not be used for any purpose while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular phones while driving. NOTE: ∙ If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Only the USB connection port located below the instrument panel will allow operation of the USB/iPod® devices through the audio system. ∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. There is a USB/iPod® charging port located in the center console. This port will charge compatible devices. 4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems iPod®/iPhone® CAUTION ∙ Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control modules. ∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness. ∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer. ∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body. ∙ For additional information, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. “Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone or iPad may affect wireless performance. iPad, iPhone, iPod classic, iPod Nano, iPod shuffle and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43 5 Starting and driving Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 On-pavement and off-road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . .5-11 Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11 Ignition switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Continuously Variable Transmission . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Push-button ignition switch (if so equipped) . . . . 5-15 Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . 5-17 Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Starting the engine (models without NISSAN Intelligent Key® system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Starting the engine (models with NISSAN Intelligent Key® system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-21 Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Pedal type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Switch type (models with electronic parking brake system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Automatic brake hold (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 How to activate/deactivate the automatic brake hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 How to use the automatic brake hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 SPORT mode switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 ECO mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 LDW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 How to enable/disable the LDW system . . . . . 5-37 LDW system limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 I-LI system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 How to enable/disable the I-LI system. . . . . . . 5-42 I-LI system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46 BSW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48 How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . . . 5-50 BSW system limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50 BSW driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57 RCTA system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58 How to enable/disable the RCTA system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60 RCTA system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64 Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65 Precautions on cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65 Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped). . . . . . . . 5-67 How to select the cruise control mode . . . . . . 5-69 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-86 ProPILOT Assist (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91 ProPILOT Assist system operation . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93 Turning the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96 Operating ProPILOT Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97 How to enable/disable the Steering Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist). . . . . . . . . . . 5-103 Steering Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-124 AEB system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125 Turning the AEB system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127 AEB system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 5-132 AEB with Pedestrian Detection system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133 Turning the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135 AEB with Pedestrian Detection system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139 Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) (if so equipped) . 5-141 RAB system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-142 Turning the RAB system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143 RAB system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146 Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146 Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-147 Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 5-148 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK switch operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-149 Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152 Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-153 Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-153 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-154 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . 5-155 Brake force distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157 Chassis Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-158 Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-158 Intelligent Engine Brake (I-EB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-159 Active Ride Control (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-160 Hill start assist system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-161 Rear Sonar System (RSS) (if so equipped) . . . . . . 5-162 System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-163 How to enable/disable the sonar system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-165 Sonar limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-166 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-166 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167 Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167 Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167 Draining of coolant water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-168 Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-168 Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-168 Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-168 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-169 PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING ∙ Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) WARNING ∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death. ∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately. ∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. ∙ Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage. ∙ To avoid raising the center of gravity excessively, do not exceed the rated capacity of the roof rack (if so equipped) and evenly distribute the load. ∙ Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates, doors and trunk lids (if so equipped) closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with one of these open, follow these precautions: ∙ Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time. 1. Open all the windows. 5-4 Starting and driving air recirculation but2. Set the ton to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air. ∙ If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the liftgate or the body, follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. ∙ The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever: a. The vehicle is raised for service. b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment. c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system. d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle. THREE-WAY CATALYST The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants. WARNING ∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components. ∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. CAUTION ∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst’s ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants. ∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause over rich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst. ∙ Do not race the engine while warming it up. ∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. Starting and driving 5-5 When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. Additional information: ∙ When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire. 5-6 Starting and driving ∙ The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a flat tire while driving). ∙ The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. ∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. ∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning appears in the vehicle information display when the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure is detected. The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off. ∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction. ∙ Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the outside temperature. Do not reduce the tire pressure after driving because the tire pressure rises after driving. Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, check the tire pressure for all four tires. ∙ The Tire and Loading Information label is located in the driver’s door opening. ∙ You can also check the pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the vehicle information display screen. The order of the tire pressure figures displayed on the screen corresponds with the actual order of the tire position. For additional information, refer to “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “Instruments and controls” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. WARNING ∙ Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use. ∙ If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. (For additional information, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section for changing a flat tire.) ∙ When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, when a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. ∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors. Starting and driving 5-7 CAUTION ∙ The TPMS may not function properly when the wheels are equipped with tire chains or the wheels are buried in snow. ∙ Do not place metalized film or any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function properly. Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. Some examples are: ∙ Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle. ∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle. ∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle. The low tire pressure warning light may illuminate in the following cases: ∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and tire without TPMS. ∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID has not been registered. ∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by NISSAN. FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For Canada: This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). 5-8 Starting and driving Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle to help you inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure. Vehicle set-up 1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place. 2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in the P (Park) position. 3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. Do not start the engine. Operation 1. Add air to the tire. 2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators will start flashing. 3. When the designated pressure is reached, the horn beeps once and the hazard indicators stop flashing. 4. Perform the above steps for each tire. ∙ If the tire is over-inflated more than approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn beeps and the hazard indicators flash three times. To correct the pressure, push the core of the valve stem on the tire briefly to release pressure. When the pressure reaches the designated pressure, the horn beeps once. ∙ If the hazard indicator does not flash within approximately 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not operating. ∙ The TPMS will not activate the EasyFill Tire Alert under the following conditions: – If there is interference from an external device or transmitter. – The air pressure from the inflation device is not sufficient to inflate the tire. – There is a malfunction in the TPMS. – There is a malfunction in the horn or hazard indicators. – The identification code of the tire pressure sensor is not registered to the system. – The battery of the tire pressure sensor is low. ∙ If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not operate due to TPMS interference, move the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward or forward and try again. If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a tire pressure gauge. ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING PRECAUTIONS sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. For additional information, refer to “Driving safety precautions” in this section. AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident. They have higher ground clearance than passenger cars to make them capable of performing in a variety of on-pavement and off-road applications. This gives them a higher center of gravity than ordinary vehicles. An advantage of higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. However, they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional 2-Wheel Drive vehicles any more than low-slung Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. Starting and driving 5-9 As with any vehicle, loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so. Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt. OFF-ROAD RECOVERY While driving, the right side or left side wheels may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic. 5-10 Starting and driving 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS 2. Do not apply the brakes. Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under-inflated tires. 3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course. 4. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle. 5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle to follow the road while vehicle speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced. 6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface. When all tires are on the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane. ∙ If you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road. Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway speeds. Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually inspecting the tires for wear and damage. For additional information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic. WARNING The following actions can increase the chance of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure. Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury. ∙ The vehicle generally moves or pulls in the direction of the flat tire. ∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes. ∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator pedal. ∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel. 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. 2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course. 3. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle. 4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible. 5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle. 6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire. For additional information, refer to “Changing a flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING WARNING Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury. NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol-related collisions. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol. Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! That is true for drugs (over-the-counter, prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’t drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition. DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep water or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road vehicle. Remember that 2-Wheel Drive (2WD) models are less capable than All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models for rough road driving and extrication when stuck in deep snow or mud, or the like. Starting and driving 5-11 Please observe the following precautions: WARNING ∙ Spinning the front wheels on slippery surfaces may cause the AWD warning message to display and the AWD system to automatically switch from the AWD to the 2WD mode. This could reduce the traction. Be especially careful when towing a trailer (AWD models). ∙ Drive carefully when off the road and avoid dangerous areas. Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should be seated with their seat belt fastened. This will keep you and your passengers in position when driving over rough terrain. ∙ Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead drive either straight up or straight down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can tip over sideways much more easily than they can forward or backward. ∙ Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. If you drive up them, you may stall. If you drive down them, you may not be able to control your speed. If you drive across them, you may roll over. ∙ Do not shift gears while driving on downhill grades as this could cause loss of control of the vehicle. ∙ Stay alert when driving to the top of a hill. At the top there could be a dropoff or other hazard that could cause an accident. ∙ If your engine stalls or you cannot make it to the top of a steep hill, never attempt to turn around. Your vehicle could tip or roll over. Always back straight down in the R (Reverse) gear and apply brakes to control your speed. ∙ Heavy braking going down a hill could cause your brakes to overheat and fade, resulting in loss of control and an accident. Apply brakes lightly and use a low gear to control your speed. ∙ Unsecured cargo can be thrown around when driving over rough terrain. Properly secure all cargo so it will not be thrown forward and cause injury to you or your passengers. ∙ To avoid raising the center of gravity excessively, do not exceed the rated capacity of the roof rack (if so equipped) and evenly distribute the load. ∙ Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as far forward and as low as possible. Do not equip the vehicle with tires larger than specified in this manual. This could cause your vehicle to roll over. ∙ Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel when driving off-road. The steering wheel could move suddenly and injure your hands. Instead drive with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of the rim. ∙ Before operating the vehicle, ensure that the driver and all passengers have their seat belts fastened. ∙ Always drive with the floor mats in place as the floor may become hot. 5-12 Starting and driving ∙ Lower your speed when encountering strong crosswinds. With a higher center of gravity, your NISSAN is more affected by strong side winds. Slower speeds ensure better vehicle control. ∙ Do not drive beyond the performance capability of the tires, even with AWD engaged. ∙ For AWD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. ∙ Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing) or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with AWD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. ∙ When a wheel is off the ground due to an unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel excessively. ∙ Accelerating quickly, sharp steering maneuvers or sudden braking may cause loss of control. ∙ If at all possible, avoid sharp turning maneuvers, particularly at high speeds. Your NISSAN vehicle has a higher center of gravity than a passenger car. The vehicle is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as passenger cars. ∙ Failure to operate this vehicle correctly could result in loss of control and/or a rollover accident. ∙ Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction (bias, biasbelted, or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Install tire chains on the front wheels when driving on slippery roads and drive carefully. ∙ Be sure to check the brakes immediately after driving in mud or water. For additional information, refer to “Brake precautions” in this section. ∙ Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it rolls forward, backward or sideways, you could be injured. ∙ Whenever you drive off-road through sand, mud or water as deep as the wheel hub, more frequent maintenance may be required. For additional information, refer to “Maintenance under severe operating conditions” in the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual. Starting and driving 5-13 IGNITION SWITCH (if so equipped) When the ignition switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position: WARNING Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel will lock (for models with a steering lock mechanism). This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. 2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ON direction. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 4. Remove the key if it is inserted in the ignition switch. LIC2717 CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position. ∙ When moving the ignition switch to the LOCK position, make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position. ∙ When removing the key from the ignition switch, make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position. 5-14 Starting and driving If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position, the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position. The shift lever can be moved if the ignition switch is placed in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed. KEY POSITIONS LOCK: Normal parking position (0) Off position (1) This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running. ON: Normal operating position (2) This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories. PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH (if so equipped) START: (3) This position starts the engine. As soon as the engine has started, release the key. It automatically returns to the ON position. NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key. If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices. WARNING Do not operate the push-button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency. (The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed three consecutive times in quick succession or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a crash and serious injury. If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedure: 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds. 2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 seconds. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key. Starting and driving 5-15 The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch position cannot be switched to OFF until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position. When the ignition switch cannot be pushed toward the OFF position, proceed as follows: 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. 2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch position will change to the ON position. LSD2184 When the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch will illuminate. Push the ignition switch center: ∙ Once to change to ON. ∙ Two times to change to OFF. The ignition switch will automatically return to the LOCK position when any door is either opened or closed with the switch in the OFF position. 5-16 Starting and driving 3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFF position. The shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed. If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the push-button ignition switch cannot be moved from the LOCK position. Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed on the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. LSD2020 OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range. When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower and may not function properly. If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition switch to start the engine. The operating range of the engine start 1 . function is inside of the vehicle 䊊 ∙ The luggage area is not included in the operating range, but the Intelligent Key may function. ∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument panel or inside the glove box, storage bin or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not function. ∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Key may function. PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS LOCK (Normal parking position): The ignition switch can only be locked in this position. The ignition switch will lock when any door is opened or closed with the ignition switched off. ON (Normal operating position): AUTO ACC: This position turns on the ignition system and electrical accessories. With the vehicle in the P (Park) position, the Intelligent Key with you and the ignition switch placed from the ON position to the OFF position, the radio can still be used for a period of time, or until the driver’s door is opened. ON has a battery saver feature that will place the ignition switch in the OFF position, if the vehicle is not running, after some time under the following conditions: ∙ All doors are closed. ∙ The shift lever is in P (Park). The battery saver feature will be canceled if any of the following occur: ∙ Any door is opened. ∙ The shift lever is moved out of the P (Park) position. ∙ The ignition switch changes position. CAUTION After a period of time, functions such as radio, navigation, and Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System may be restarted by pressing the POWER button/VOLUME control knob or the key fob unlock button. For additional information, refer to the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual. EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following procedure: Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position when the engine is not running for an extended period. This can discharge the battery. ∙ Rapidly push the ignition switch three consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or OFF: ∙ Push and hold the ignition switch for more than 2 seconds. The ignition switch is in the OFF position when the engine is turned off using the ignition switch. No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch. Starting and driving 5-17 After step 3 is performed, when the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position will change to the ON position. 4. Push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the chime sounds. The engine will start. NOTE: SSD0860 NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® BATTERY DISCHARGE If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key® is discharged or environmental conditions interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine according to the following procedure: 1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position. 2. Firmly apply the foot brake. 3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.) 5-18 Starting and driving ∙ When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position or the engine is started by the above procedure, the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears in the vehicle information display even when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is not a malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key again. ∙ If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears, replace the battery as soon as possible. For additional information, refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual. NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key. If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedure: 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds. 2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 seconds. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key. If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices. BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE (models without NISSAN Intelligent Key® system) ∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear. ∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake fluid, and windshieldwasher fluid as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel. ∙ Check that all windows and lights are clean. ∙ Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation. ∙ Check that all doors are closed. ∙ Position seat and restraints/headrests. adjust head ∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors. ∙ Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise. ∙ Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. For additional information, refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended. The shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition key is turned to the OFF position or if the key is removed from the ignition switch. The starter is designed not to operate if the shift lever is in any of the driving positions. 3. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to the START position. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure. ∙ If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it and then crank the engine. Release the key and the accelerator pedal when the engine starts. ∙ If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Crank the engine for 5 to 6 seconds. After cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to the START position. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure. CAUTION Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, turn the key off and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged. 4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at a moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. Starting and driving 5-19 STARTING THE ENGINE (models with NISSAN Intelligent Key® system) NOTE: 1. Apply the parking brake. Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as: 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended. 1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.). 2. The vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances. In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health. The starter is designed not to operate if the shift lever is in any of the driving positions. 3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. Depress the brake pedal and push the ignition switch to start the engine. To start the engine immediately, push and release the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch in any position. ∙ If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while holding, crank the engine. Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts. ∙ If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Push the ignition switch to the ON position to start cranking the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the ignition 5-20 Starting and driving switch to the LOCK position. After cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by depressing the brake pedal and pushing the ignition switch to start the engine. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure. CAUTION Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged. 4. Warm-up: Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at a moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 to 3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start. DRIVING THE VEHICLE 5. To stop the engine, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and push the ignition switch to the OFF position. NOTE: Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as: 1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.). 2. The vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances. In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health. REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped) Vehicles started with the Remote Engine Start require the ignition switch to be placed in the ON position before the shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position. To place the ignition switch in the ON position, follow these steps: 1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on you. 2. Apply the brake. 3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON position. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual. CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT) WARNING ∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), or M (Manual shift mode). Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident. ∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up. ∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control. ∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission. Starting and driving 5-21 CAUTION ∙ To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose. ∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission. The CVT in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation. The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment. Engine power may be automatically reduced to protect the CVT if the engine speed increases quickly when driving on slippery roads or while being tested on some dynamometers. 5-22 Starting and driving LSD3073 1. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) 2. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) when shaded and Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) when solid 3. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) LSD3074 Starting the vehicle 1. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift lever out of the P (Park) position. This Continuously Variable Transmission is designed so that the foot brake pedal must be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any driving position while the ignition switch is in the ON position. The shift lever cannot be moved out of the P (Park) position and into any of the other positions if the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK or OFF position. 2. A screen is displayed for a period of time that indicates the status of the driving aid functions (if so equipped). – AEB, LDW, and BSW are enabled when the specified driving aid is shaded. – I-LI is enabled when the driving aid is solid. 1 2 or 䊊 button – Use the 䊊 to navigate the settings screen. For additional information, refer to “How to use the vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. 3. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift lever to a driving position. 4. Release the parking brake and foot brake pedal, and then gradually start the vehicle in motion. WARNING ∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or M (Manual shift mode). Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident. ∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up. CAUTION ∙ To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose. ∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission. ∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control. ∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission. Starting and driving 5-23 CAUTION Use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped. P (Park) CAUTION To prevent transmission damage, use the P (Park) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped. LSD2691 Shifting After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal, press the shift lever button and move the shift lever from the P (Park) position to any of the desired shift positions. WARNING Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage. 5-24 Starting and driving Use the P (Park) shift lever position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake pedal must be depressed and the shift lever button pressed in to move the shift lever from N (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then move the shift lever into the P (Park) position. R (Reverse) CAUTION To prevent transmission damage, use the R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped. Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be depressed and the shift lever button pressed in to move the shift lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R (Reverse). N (Neutral) Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving. D (Drive) Use this position for all normal forward driving. Manual shift mode When the shift lever is in the manual shift gate, the transmission is ready for the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually by moving the shift lever up or down. To cancel manual shift mode, return the shift lever to the D (Drive) position. The transmission returns to automatic driving mode. When the shift lever is shifted from D (Drive) to the manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or while driving, the transmission enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually. In the manual shift mode, the shift range is displayed on the position indicator in the meter. When moving the shift lever to the manual shift gate, the position indicator displays 1 (1st) up to 7 (7th) depending on vehicle speed. Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows: 1⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5 ⇔ 6 ⇔ 7 7 (7th) Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds. 6 (6th) and 5 (5th) Use this position when driving up long slopes, or for engine braking when driving down long slopes. 4 (4th), 3 (3rd) and 2 (2nd) Use these positions for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades. 1 (1st) When canceling the manual shift mode Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or when driving slowly, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades. Return the shift lever to the D (Drive) position to return the transmission to the normal driving mode. ∙ Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than 7th gear. This reduces fuel economy. When shifting up Move the shift lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts to higher range.) When shifting down Move the shift lever to the ⫺ (down) side. (Shifts to lower range.) ∙ The transmission will automatically downshift the gears. (For example, if you select the 3rd range, the transmission will shift down between the 3rd and 1st gears.) ∙ Moving the shift lever rapidly to the same side twice will shift the ranges in succession. ∙ In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected gear. This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control. ∙ When this situation occurs, the Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) position indicator light will blink and the chime will sound. ∙ In the manual shift mode, the transmission may shift up automatically to a higher range than selected if the engine speed is too high. When the vehicle speed decreases, the transmission automatically shifts down and shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop. ∙ CVT operation is limited to automatic drive mode when CVT fluid temperature is extremely low even if manual shift mode is selected. This is not a malfunction. When CVT fluid warms up, manual mode can be selected. Starting and driving 5-25 ∙ When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the shift range may upshift in lower rpm than usual. This is not a malfunction. 3. Remove the shift lock release cover using a suitable tool. 4. Push down the shift lock release using a suitable tool. LSD2756 Shift lock release If the battery charge is low or discharged, the shift lever may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed and the shift lever button pressed. To move the shift lever, perform the following procedure: 1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position. 2. Apply the parking brake. 5-26 Starting and driving 5. Press the shift lever button and move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position while holding down the shift lock release. The vehicle may be moved to the desired location. Replace the removed shift lock release cover after the operation. If the shift lever cannot be moved out of the P (Park) position, have the Continuously Variable Transmission system checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. WARNING If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others. Accelerator downshift — in D (Drive) position — For passing or hill climbing, depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed. High fluid temperature protection mode This transmission has a high fluid temperature protection mode. If the fluid temperature becomes too high (for example, when climbing steep grades in high temperatures with heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine power and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be limited. If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is activated. For additional information, refer to “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait for 10 seconds. Then place the ignition switch back in the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have the transmission checked and repaired, if necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. WARNING When the high fluid temperature protection mode or fail-safe operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If necessary, pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the transmission to return to normal operation, or have it repaired if necessary. Fail-safe When the fail-safe operation occurs, the Continuously Variable Transmission will not be shifted into the selected driving position. Starting and driving 5-27 PARKING BRAKE WARNING ∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident. ∙ Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle. ∙ Do not use the shift lever in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged. ∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets. LSD0158 PEDAL TYPE To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake. To release: 1. Firmly apply the foot brake. 2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. 3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it will release. 4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out. 5-28 Starting and driving LSD2828 SWITCH TYPE (models with electronic parking brake system) The electronic parking brake can be applied or released automatically or by operating the parking brake switch. Automatic operation The electronic parking brake will apply automatically if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position when the brake force is maintained by the automatic brake hold function. The electronic parking brake is automatically released as soon as the vehicle starts and the accelerator pedal is depressed. The driver’s seat belt needs to be fastened. WARNING ∙ The electronic parking brake will not be automatically applied when the engine is stopped without using the ignition switch (for example, by engine stalling). Without the vehicle stationary, the electronic parking brake will not be automatically applied even if the engine is turned off with the ignition switch. ∙ Before leaving the vehicle, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and check that the electronic parking brake warning light is illuminated to confirm that the electronic parking brake is applied. The electronic parking brake warning light will remain on for a period of time after the driver’s door is locked. CAUTION When parking in an area where the outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), the parking brake, if applied, may freeze in place and may be difficult to release. For safe parking, it is recommended that you place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and securely block the wheels. NOTE: ∙ To keep the electronic parking brake released after the engine is turned off, place the ignition switch in the OFF position, depress the brake pedal and push down the parking brake switch before opening the driver’s door. ∙ If a malfunction occurs in the electronic parking brake system (for example, due to battery discharge), it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. ∙ If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened when the brake force is maintained by the automatic brake hold function, the electronic parking brake will apply automatically. ∙ If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position when the brake force is maintained by the automatic brake hold function, the electronic parking brake will apply automatically. Manual operation The electronic parking brake will not be automatically applied if the engine is stopped without using the ignition switch (for example, by engine stalling). In such a case, you have to apply the parking brake manually. 1 . The indicaTo apply: Pull the switch up 䊊 A will illuminate. tor light 䊊 To release: With the ignition switch in the ON position, depress the brake pedal and 2 . The indicator push the switch down 䊊 A will turn off. light 䊊 ∙ If the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position when the brake force is maintained by the automatic brake hold function, the electronic parking brake will apply automatically. Starting and driving 5-29 Before driving, check that the electronic or PARK) parking brake indicator light ( goes out. For additional information, refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. NOTE: ∙ A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven without releasing the parking brake. For additional information, refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. ∙ While the electronic parking brake is applied or released, an operating sound is heard from the lower side of the rear seat. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. ∙ When the electronic parking brake is frequently applied and released in a short period of time, the parking brake may not operate in order to prevent the parking brake system from overheating. If this occurs, operate the electronic parking brake switch again after waiting approximately 1 minute. 5-30 Starting and driving ∙ If the electronic parking brake must be applied while driving in an emergency, pull up and hold the parking brake switch. When you release the parking brake switch, the parking brake will be released. ∙ While pulling up the electronic parking brake switch during driving, the parking brake is applied and a chime sounds. The electronic parking brake indicator light in the meter and in the parking brake switch illuminates. This does not indicate a malfunction. The electronic parking brake indicator light in the meter and in the parking brake switch turns off when the parking brake is released. ∙ When pulling the electronic parking brake switch up with the ignition switch in the OFF or AUTO ACC position, the parking brake switch indicator light will continue to illuminate for a short period of time. When towing a trailer Depending on the weight of the vehicle and trailer and the steepness of the slope, there may be a tendency for the vehicle to move backwards when starting from a standstill. When this occurs, you can use the parking brake switch in the same way as a conventional lever type parking brake. Before starting on sloping roads when towing a trailer, be sure to read the following to prevent the vehicle from moving backward unintentionally: ∙ Release the parking brake switch as soon as the engine is delivering enough torque to the wheels. AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD (if so equipped) The automatic brake hold function maintains the braking force without the driver having to depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped at a traffic light or intersection. As soon as the driver depresses the accelerator pedal again, the automatic brake hold function is deactivated and the braking force is released. The operating status of the automatic brake hold can be displayed on the vehicle information display. WARNING ∙ The automatic brake hold function is not designed to hold the vehicle on a steep hill or slippery road. Never use the automatic brake hold when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill or slippery road. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move. ∙ When the automatic brake hold function is activated but fails to maintain the vehicle at a standstill, depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle. If the vehicle unexpectedly moves due to outside conditions, the chime may sound and automatic brake hold warning may illuminate in the vehicle information display. ∙ Be sure to deactivate the automatic brake hold function when using a car wash or towing your vehicle. ∙ Make sure to place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake when parking your vehicle, riding on or off the vehicle, or loading luggage. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move or roll away unexpectedly and result in serious personal injury or property damage. ∙ If any of the following conditions occur, the automatic brake hold function may not function. Have the system checked promptly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these conditions could cause the vehicle to move or roll away unexpectedly and result in serious personal injury or property damage. – The indicator light on the automatic brake hold switch does not illuminate when the switch is pushed. ∙ The automatic brake hold function will not be activated if the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light, electronic parking brake warning light or master warning light illuminate and the chassis control system fault message appears in the vehicle information display. ∙ To maintain the braking force to keep the vehicle to a standstill, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction. – A warning message appears in the vehicle information display. Starting and driving 5-31 How to activate the automatic brake hold function 1. With the ignition switch in the ON position, push the automatic brake hold 1 . The indicator light on the auswitch 䊊 2 illumitomatic brake hold switch 䊊 nates. 2. When the automatic brake hold function goes into standby, the automatic brake hold indicator light (white) illuminates. LSD2830 To use the automatic brake hold function, the following conditions need to be met: HOW TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE THE AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD FUNCTION ∙ The driver’s seat belt is fastened. For additional information on activating and deactivating the automatic brake hold function, refer to the instructions outlined in this section. ∙ The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. ∙ The electronic parking brake is released. ∙ The vehicle is not parked on a steep hill. NOTE: The automatic brake hold function resets to OFF every time the ignition switch is switched from the OFF position to the ON position. 5-32 Starting and driving How to deactivate the automatic brake hold function While the automatic brake hold function is activated, push the automatic brake hold switch to turn off the automatic brake hold indicator light and deactivate the automatic brake hold function. To deactivate the automatic brake hold function while the brake force has been maintained by the automatic brake hold function, depress the brake pedal and push the automatic brake hold switch. WARNING Make sure to firmly depress and hold the brake pedal when turning off the automatic brake hold function while the brake force is applied. When the automatic brake hold function is deactivated, the brake force will be released. This could cause the vehicle to move or roll away unexpectedly. Failure to prevent the vehicle from rolling may result in serious personal injury or property damage. HOW TO USE THE AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD FUNCTION The automatic brake hold indicator light (white) on the meter illuminates and the automatic brake hold returns to standby. For additional information on using the automatic brake hold function, refer to the instructions outlined in this section. Parking To maintain braking force automatically With the automatic brake hold function activated and the automatic brake hold indicator light (white) illuminated on the meter, depress the braking pedal to stop the vehicle. The brake force is automatically applied without your foot depressed on the brake pedal. While the brake hold is maintained, the automatic brake hold indicator light (green) illuminates on the meter. To start the vehicle from a standstill With the shift lever not in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position, depress the accelerator pedal while the brake force is maintained. The brake force will automatically be released to restart the vehicle. When the shift lever is in the P (Park) position with the brake force maintained by the automatic brake hold function, the parking brake will automatically be applied and the brake force of the automatic brake hold will be released. The automatic brake hold indicator light turns off. When the parking brake is applied with the brake force maintained by the automatic brake hold function, the brake force of the automatic brake hold will be released. The automatic brake hold indicator light turns off. NOTE: – The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. – If a malfunction occurs in the automatic brake hold function. ∙ When the vehicle stops, but the brake force is not automatically applied, depress the brake pedal firmly until the automatic brake hold indicator light (green) illuminates. Automatic brake hold function display The automatic brake hold function status can be checked in the “Chassis Control” mode in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. ∙ Under the following conditions, the parking brake will automatically be applied and the brake force of the automatic brake hold will be released: – The braking force is applied by the automatic brake hold function for 3 minutes or longer. – The driver’s seat belt is unfastened. Starting and driving 5-33 SPORT MODE SWITCH ECO MODE SWITCH The ECO mode cannot be turned off while the accelerator pedal is depressed, even if the ECO mode switch is pushed to OFF. Release the accelerator pedal to turn off the ECO mode. The ECO mode will turn off automatically if a malfunction occurs in the system. Turn off the ECO mode or depress the accelerator pedal fully when: ∙ Driving with a heavy load of passengers or cargo in the vehicle ∙ Driving on a steep uphill slope LIC2417 LIC2416 The SPORT mode switch adjusts the engine and transmission points to enhance performance. Push the SPORT mode switch on the instrument panel to activate. The SPORT mode indicator appears in the vehicle information display. The ECO mode helps to enhance the fuel economy by controlling the throttle sensitivity and transmission points. NOTE: To turn on the ECO mode, push the ECO mode switch. The ECO mode indicator (on the meter) will remain lit while the mode is active. Selecting this drive mode will not necessarily improve fuel economy as many driving factors influence its effectiveness. NOTE: In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may be reduced. 5-34 Starting and driving To turn off the ECO mode, push the ECO mode switch again. The ECO mode indicator (on the meter) will turn off. ∙ ECO mode may affect air conditioner performance LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) (if so equipped) The LDW system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only when the lane markings are clearly visible on the road. The LDW system monitors the lane markers on the traveling lane using the camera A located above the inside mirror. unit 䊊 The LDW system warns the driver with an indicator and chime that the vehicle is beginning to leave the driving lane. For additional information, refer to “LDW system operation” in this section. LSD2795 WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death. ∙ This system is only a warning device to inform the driver of a potential unintended lane departure. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times. Starting and driving 5-35 LDW SYSTEM OPERATION The LDW system provides a lane departure warning function when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above and the lane markings are clear. When the vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, a warning chime will sound and the LDW indicator on the instrument panel will blink to alert the driver. The warning function will stop when the vehicle returns inside of the lane markers. LSD3307 5-36 Starting and driving HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE LDW SYSTEM Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDW system. button until “Settings” 1. Press the displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select play. Use the “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the OK button. 3. To set the LDW system to on or off, use buttons to navigate in the the menu and use the OK button to select or change an item: ∙ Select “Lane” and press the OK button. – To turn on the warning system, use the OK button to check the box for “Warning (LDW).” LSD3093 Starting and driving 5-37 LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the LDW system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death. ∙ The system will not operate at speeds below approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane markers. ∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard. ∙ Do not use the LDW system under the following conditions as it may not function properly: – During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). – When driving on slippery roads, such as on ice or snow. – When driving on winding or uneven roads. – When there is a lane closure due to road repairs. 5-38 Starting and driving – When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane. – When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow. – When driving without normal tire conditions (for example, tire wear, low tire pressure, installation of spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard wheels). – When the vehicle is equipped with non-original brake parts or suspension parts. – When you are towing a trailer or other vehicle. ∙ The system may not function properly under the following conditions: – On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane markers; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc. – On roads where the discontinued lane markers are still detectable. – On roads where there are sharp curves. – On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs. (The LDW system could detect these items as lane markers.) – On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates. – When the vehicle’s traveling direction does not align with the lane marker. – When traveling close to the vehicle in front of you, which obstructs the lane camera unit detection range. – When rain, snow, dirt or an object adheres to the windshield in front of the lane camera unit. – When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly. – When strong light enters the lane camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.) – When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.) SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then started, the LDW system may be deactivated automatically and the following message will appear in the vehicle information display: “Unavailable: High Cabin Temp.” When the interior temperature is reduced, the LDW system will resume operating automatically. The LDW system is not designed to warn under the following conditions: ∙ When you operate the lane change signal and change traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The LDW system will become operable again approximately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is turned off.) ∙ When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h). After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the LDW functions will resume. SYSTEM MALFUNCTION If the LDW system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically and “Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual” will appear in the vehicle information display. If “Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual” appears in the vehicle information display, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and the ignition switch in the OFF position and restart the engine/motor. If “Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual” continues to appear in the vehicle information display, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. LSD2712 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE 1 for the LDW sysThe lane camera unit 䊊 tem is located above the inside mirror. To keep the proper operation of the LDW system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following: ∙ Always keep the windshield clean. ∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit. Starting and driving 5-39 INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION (I-LI) (if so equipped) ∙ Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit’s capability of detecting the lane markers. ∙ The I-LI system is primarily intended for use on well-developed freeways or highways. It may not detect the lane markers in certain road, weather, or driving conditions. The I-LI system must be turned on with the dynamic driver assistance switch (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) or the ProPILOT Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) on the steering wheel, every time the ignition is placed in the ON position. ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. LSD2795 WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the I-LI system could result in serious injury or death. ∙ The I-LI system will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times. 5-40 Starting and driving The I-LI system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only when the lane markings are clearly visible on the road. The I-LI system warns the driver when the vehicle has left the center of the traveling lane with an indicator and chime. The system helps assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane by applying the brakes to the left or right wheels individually (for a short period of time). The I-LI system monitors the lane markers on the traveling lane using the camera unit A located above the inside mirror. 䊊 1 䊊 2 䊊 3 䊊 4 䊊 Dynamic driver assistance switch (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) indicator (if so equipped) ProPILOT Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) I-LI SYSTEM OPERATION The I-LI system operates above approximately 37 mph (60 km/h). When the vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, a warning chime will sound and the LDW indicator (orange) on the instrument panel will blink to alert the driver. Then, the I-LI system will automatically apply the brakes for a short period of time to help assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane. LSD3308 To turn on the I-LI system, push the dynamic driver assistance switch (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) or the ProPILOT Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) on the steering wheel after starting the engine/motor. The I-LI indicator on the instrument panel will illuminate. Push the dynamic driver assistance switch or the ProPILOT Assist switch again to turn off the I-LI system. The I-LI indicator will turn off. Starting and driving 5-41 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-LI SYSTEM Perform the following steps to enable or disable the I-LI system. button until “Settings” 1. Press the displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select play. Use the “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the OK button. 3. To set the I-LI system to on or off, use buttons to navigate in the the menu and use the OK button to select or change an item: ∙ Select “Lane” and press the OK button. – To turn on the I–LI system, use the OK button to check the box for “Prevention (LDP).” LSD3093 5-42 Starting and driving 4. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) or the dynamic driver assistance switch (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) to turn the system on or off. NOTE: When “Prevention (LDP)” is selected in the settings menu, turning the ProPILOT Assist system (if so equipped) on will activate the I-LI system at the same time. If “Prevention (LDP)” is not selected in the settings menu, I-LI will automatically activate when the ProPILOT Assist system is “SET.” For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in this section. I-LI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the I-LI system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the I-LI system could result in serious injury or death. ∙ The I-LI system may activate if you change lanes without first activating your turn signal or, for example, if a construction zone directs traffic to cross an existing lane marker. If this occurs you may need to apply corrective steering to complete your lane change. ∙ Because the I-LI may not activate under the road, weather, and lane marker conditions described in this section, it may not activate every time your vehicle begins to leave its lane and you will need to apply corrective steering. ∙ When the I-LI system is operating, avoid excessive or sudden steering maneuvers. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle. ∙ The I-LI system will not operate at speeds below approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane markers. ∙ Do not use the I-LI system under the following conditions as it may not function properly: – During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). – When driving on slippery roads, such as on ice or snow. – When driving on winding or uneven roads. – When there is a lane closure due to road repairs. – When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane. – When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow. – When driving without normal tire conditions (for example, tire wear, low tire pressure, installation of spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard wheels). – When the vehicle is equipped with nonoriginal brake parts or suspension parts. – When you are towing a trailer or other vehicle. – On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane markers; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc. – On roads where discontinued lane markers are still detectable. – On roads where there are sharp curves. Starting and driving 5-43 – On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs. (The I-LI system could detect these items as lane markers.) – On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates. – When the vehicle’s traveling direction does not align with the lane marker. – When traveling close to the vehicle in front of you, which obstructs the lane camera unit detection range. – When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the windshield in front of the lane camera unit. – When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly. – When strong light enters the lane camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.) – When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.) ∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard. While the I-LI system is operating, you may hear a sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the I-LI system is operating properly. SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE Condition A: The warning and assist functions of the I-LI system are not designed to work under the following conditions: ∙ When you operate the lane change signal and change the traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The I-LI system will be deactivated for approximately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is turned off.) ∙ When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h). 5-44 Starting and driving After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the warning and assist functions will resume. Condition B: The assist function of the I-LI system is not designed to work under the following conditions (warning is still functional): ∙ When the brake pedal is depressed. ∙ When the steering wheel is turned as far as necessary for the vehicle to change lanes. ∙ When the vehicle is accelerated during I-LI system operation. ∙ When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) approach warning occurs. ∙ When the hazard warning flashers are operated. ∙ When driving on a curve at high speed. After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the I-LI system application of the brakes will resume. Condition C: If the following messages appear in the vehicle information display, a chime will sound and the I-LI system will be turned off automatically. ∙ “Not Available Poor Road Conditions”: When the VDC system (except Traction Control System [TCS] function) or ABS operates. ∙ “Currently not available”: When the VDC system is turned off. Temporary disabled status at high temperature: If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then the I-LI system is turned on, the I-LI system may be deactivated automatically and the following message will appear on the vehicle information display: “Unavailable: High Cabin Temp.” When the interior temperature is reduced, the system will resume operating automatically. Action to take: SYSTEM MALFUNCTION When the above conditions no longer exist, turn off the I-LI system. Push the dynamic driver assistance switch (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) or the ProPILOT Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) on the steering wheel again to turn the I-LI system back on. If the I-LI system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically. The I-LI indicator (orange) will illuminate in the display. If the I-LI indicator (orange) illuminates in the display, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle. Turn the engine/motor off and restart the engine/motor. If the I-LI indicator (orange) continues to illuminate, have the I-LI system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. LSD2712 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE 1 for the I-LI system The lane camera unit 䊊 is located above the inside mirror. To keep the proper operation of the I-LI system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following: ∙ Always keep the windshield clean. ∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit. Starting and driving 5-45 BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) ∙ Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit’s capability of detecting the lane markers. ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSW system could result in serious injury or death. ∙ The BSW system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW system. The BSW system helps alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes. 5-46 Starting and driving LSD2439 1 The BSW system uses radar sensors 䊊 installed near the rear bumper to detect other vehicles in an adjacent lane. SSD1030 Detection zone The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways. Starting and driving 5-47 1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light 2. BSW indicator BSW SYSTEM OPERATION The BSW system operates above approximately 20 mph (32 km/h). If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the system chimes (twice), the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes, and the BSW indicator illuminates (yellow) in the vehicle information display. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves the detection zone. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indicator light is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. LSD3306 5-48 Starting and driving If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after the driver activates the turn signal, then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes and no chime sounds. For addi- tional information, refer to “BSW driving situations” in this section. The BSW system automatically turns on every time the engine/motor is started, as long as it is activated using the settings menu on the vehicle information display. LSD3095 Starting and driving 5-49 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE BSW SYSTEM Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSW system. button until “Settings” 1. Press the displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select play. Use the “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Blind Spot” and press the OK button. – To turn on the warning system, use the OK button to check the box for “Warning (BSW).” BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the BSW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. ∙ The BSW system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions. ∙ The radar sensors may not be able to detect and activate BSW when certain objects are present such as: – Pedestrian, bicycles, animals. – Vehicles such as motorcycles, low height vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles. – A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly. – A vehicle that passes through the detection zone quickly. – When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together. ∙ The radar sensors’ detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width. When driving in a wider lane, the radar sensors may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the radar sensors may detect vehicles driving two lanes away. NOTE: – Oncoming vehicles. When enabling/disabling the system, the system will retain current settings even if the engine is restarted. – Vehicles remaining in the detection zone when you accelerate from a stop. ∙ The radar sensors are designed to ignore most stationary objects; however, objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operation condition. – A vehicle merging into an adjacent lane at a speed approximately the same as your vehicle. ∙ The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles: – A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind. 5-50 Starting and driving – Severe weather – Road spray Another vehicle approaching from behind – Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on the vehicle ∙ Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles. Illustration 1: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent lane. ∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard. LSD2299 Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS Indicator on Indicator off Indicator flashing Starting and driving 5-51 ∙ If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected. LSD2300 Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn signal when another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. NOTE: ∙ The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly from behind. 5-52 Starting and driving LSD2302 Illustration 3 – Overtaking another vehicle Overtaking another vehicle Illustration 3: The side indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 2 seconds. ∙ If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected. . LSD2303 Illustration 4 – Overtaking another vehicle Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. LSD2305 Illustration 5 – Entering from the side Entering from the side Illustration 5: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from either side. NOTE: ∙ When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together. ∙ The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly. Starting and driving 5-53 ∙ The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone. LSD2308 Illustration 6 – Entering from the side Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. NOTE: ∙ If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected. 5-54 Starting and driving SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The “Side Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors. NOTE: If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system will also stop working. Action to take: When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically. LSD2735 Starting and driving 5-55 Malfunction Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision. NOTE: If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system will also stop working. Radio frequency statement Action to take: For USA Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. FCC : OAYSRR3B LSD2439 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE 1 for the BSW and The two radar sensors 䊊 RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors. Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors. 5-56 Starting and driving This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC Warning Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA) For Canada Applicable law: Canada 310 This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz Output power: less than 20 milliwatts WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RCTA system could result in serious injury or death. The RCTA system will assist you when backing out from a parking space. When the vehicle is in reverse, the system is designed to detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left of the vehicle. If the system detects cross traffic, it will alert you. ∙ The RCTA system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When backing out of a parking space, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move. Never rely solely on the RCTA system. Starting and driving 5-57 1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION The RCTA system can help alert the driver of an approaching vehicle when the driver is backing out of a parking space. When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is operational. If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from either side, the system chimes (once) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes on the side the vehicle is approaching from. LSD2734 5-58 Starting and driving LSD2216 LSD2439 1 The RCTA system uses radar sensors 䊊 installed on both sides near the rear bumper to detect an approaching vehicle. 1 can detect an apThe radar sensors 䊊 proaching vehicle from up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) away. Starting and driving 5-59 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE RCTA SYSTEM Perform the following steps to enable or disable the RCTA system. button until “Settings” 1. Press the displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select play. Use the “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Parking Aids” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Cross Traffic” and use the OK button to enable or disable the system. NOTE: When enabling/disabling the system, the system setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted. LSD2768 5-60 Starting and driving WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the RCTA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. ∙ Always check surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before backing up. The radar sensors detect approaching (moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as: – Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles, animals or child-operated toy vehicles – A vehicle that is passing at speeds greater than approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) LSD3195 RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS – A vehicle that is passing at speeds lower than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) ∙ The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations: A : When a vehicle – Illustration 䊊 parked next to you obstructs the beam of the radar sensor. Starting and driving 5-61 B : When the vehicle is – Illustration 䊊 parked in an angled parking space. C : When the vehicle is – Illustration 䊊 parked on inclined ground. D : When an approach– Illustration 䊊 ing vehicle turns into your vehicle’s parking lot aisle. E : When the angle – Illustration 䊊 formed by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small. ∙ The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles: – Severe weather – Road spray – Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on the vehicle ∙ Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles. ∙ Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard. 5-62 Starting and driving LSD2043 Illustration 1 NOTE: In the case of several vehicles approaching in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a chime may not be sounded by the RCTA system after the first vehicle passes the sensors. LSD2044 Illustration 2 SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The “Side Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. The systems are not available until the conditions no longer exist. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors. NOTE: If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system will also stop working. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically. LSD2735 Starting and driving 5-63 Malfunction Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision. NOTE: If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system will also stop working. Action to take Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Radio frequency statement For USA FCC : OAYSRR3B LSD2439 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE 1 for the BSW and The two radar sensors 䊊 RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors. Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors. 5-64 Starting and driving This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC Warning Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment For Canada Applicable law: Canada 310 CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped) This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. indicator blinks, turn the ∙ If the cruise control switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. indicator may blink when the ∙ The cruise control switch is turned on while pushing the RES+, SET-, or CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise control system, use the following procedures. Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz Output power: less than 20 milliwatts WARNING LSD3273 PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL 1. RES+ switch Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions: ∙ When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed. 2. CANCEL switch ∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed. 3. SET- switch ∙ On winding or hilly roads. 4. Cruise control switch ∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). ∙ If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The indicator in the vehicle information display then blinks to warn the driver. ∙ In very windy areas. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident. Starting and driving 5-65 CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. To turn on the cruise control, push the indicacruise control switch on. The tor in the vehicle information display will illuminate. To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the SETswitch and release it. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed. ∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed. ∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control. To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods: ∙ Push the CANCEL switch. ∙ Tap the brake pedal. 5-66 Starting and driving ∙ Push the cruise control switch off. indicator in the vehicle inforThe mation display goes out. The cruise control is automatically canceled if: To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: ∙ You depress the brake pedal while pushing the RES+ or SET- switch. The preset speed is deleted from memory. ∙ Push and hold the SET- switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed. ∙ The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed. ∙ Push and release the SET- switch. Each time you do this, the set speed decreases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). ∙ You move the shift lever to N (Neutral). To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: ∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET- switch. ∙ Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch. ∙ Push and release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed increases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). ∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET- switch and release it. To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle returns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h). To turn off the cruise control, use one of the following three methods: ∙ Push the CANCEL switch. ∙ Tap the brake pedal. ∙ Push the cruise control switch off. indicator in the vehicle inforThe mation display goes out. INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC) (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped) A ICC switch 䊊 WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the ICC system could result in serious injury or death. ∙ The ICC system is only an aid to assist the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times. ∙ Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them. ∙ Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ICC system. Read and understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the ICC system. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle’s speed in emergency situations. Do not use the ICC system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions. LSD3096 Starting and driving 5-67 ∙ In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, a warning chime will not sound to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle ahead. Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur. NOTE: For vehicles equipped with ProPILOT Assist, refer to “ProPILOT Assist” in this section. The ICC system maintains a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you within the speed range of 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144 km/h) up to the set speed. The set speed can be selected by the driver between 20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h). The vehicle travels at a set speed when the road ahead is clear. The ICC system can be set to one of two cruise control modes: ∙ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: For maintaining a selected distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you up to the preset speed 5-68 Starting and driving ∙ Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode: For cruising at a preset speed A to choose the Push the ICC switch 䊊 cruise control mode between the vehicleto-vehicle distance control mode and the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode. Once a control mode is activated, it cannot be changed to the other cruise control mode. To change the mode, push the ICC A once to turn the system off. Then switch 䊊 A again to turn the push the ICC switch 䊊 system back on and select the desired cruise control mode. Always confirm the setting in the ICC system display. For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, refer to “Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode” in this section. For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, refer to “Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode” in this section. LSD3269 HOW TO SELECT THE CRUISE CONTROL MODE Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode 1 , quickly push and release the ICC switch 䊊 A . 䊊 Selecting the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode: To choose the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode 2 , push and hold the ICC switch 䊊 A for 䊊 longer than approximately 1.5 seconds. For additional information, refer to “Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode” in this section. LSD2731 VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the ICC system automatically maintains a selected distance from the vehicle traveling in front of you according to that vehicle’s speed (up to the set speed), or at the set speed when the road ahead is clear. The ICC system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction. B detects a slower If the radar sensor 䊊 moving vehicle ahead, the system will re- Starting and driving 5-69 duce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the selected distance. The system automatically controls the throttle and applies the brakes (up to approximately 40% of vehicle braking power) if necessary. The detection range of the sensor is approximately 650 ft (200 m) ahead. LSD3270 5-70 Starting and driving VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE OPERATION The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is designed to maintain a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you and can reduce the speed to match a slower vehicle ahead. The system will decelerate the vehicle as necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC system can only apply up to 40% of the vehicle’s total braking power. This system should only be used when traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant or when vehicle speeds change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer because the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a warning chime and blink the system display to notify the driver to take necessary action. The system will cancel and a warning chime will sound if the speed is below approximately 15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle is not detected ahead. The system will also disengage when the vehicle goes above the maximum set speed. For additional information, refer to “Approach warning” in this section. The following items are controlled in the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: ∙ When there are no vehicles traveling ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode maintains the speed set by the driver. The set speed range is between approximately 20 and 90 mph (32 and 144 km/h). ∙ When the vehicle traveling ahead has moved out from its lane of travel, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode accelerates and maintains vehicle speed up to the set speed. The ICC system does not control vehicle speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles ahead when approaching toll gates or traffic congestion. ∙ When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode adjusts the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will cancel once it judges a standstill with a warning chime. Starting and driving 5-71 Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle ahead, this system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress the accelerator to properly accelerate your vehicle when acceleration is required for a lane change. Depress the brake pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead due to its sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when using the ICC system. SSD0254 When driving on the freeway at a set speed and approaching a slower traveling vehicle ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, the ICC system will accelerate and maintain the speed up to the set speed. Pay attention to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed. The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, you will have to manually control the vehicle speed. 5-72 Starting and driving LSD3265 VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE SWITCHES The system is operated by the ICC switch and four control switches, all mounted on the steering wheel. 1. CANCEL switch: Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed. 2. RES+ switch: Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally. 3. DISTANCE ∙ ICC system warning (yellow): Indicates that there is a malfunction in the ICC system. switch: Changes the vehicle’s following distance: 2. Set vehicle speed indicator: ∙ Long Indicates the set vehicle speed. ∙ Middle For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h. ∙ Short 4. ICC switch: 3. Vehicle ahead detection indicator: Master switch to activate the system. Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front of you. 5. SET- switch: 4. Set distance indicator: Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally. LSD3266 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode display and indicators Displays the selected distance between vehicles set with the distance switch. The display is located between the speedometer and tachometer. 1. This indicator indicates the ICC system status depending on a color: ∙ ICC system ON indicator (gray): Indicates that the ICC switch is on. ∙ ICC system SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set. Starting and driving 5-73 LSD3100 LSD3101 LSD3102 To turn on the cruise control, quickly push A . The ICC sysand release the ICC switch 䊊 tem ON indicator (gray), set distance indiB cator and set vehicle speed indicator 䊊 come on in a standby state for setting. To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET– C and release it. The ICC system set switch 䊊 indicator (green), vehicle ahead detection indicator, set distance indicator and set veB will come on. Take hicle speed indicator 䊊 your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed. When the SET– switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set and the ICC indicators will blink for approximately 2 seconds: Operating vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode ∙ When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h) and a vehicle ahead is not detected ∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or Manual mode ∙ When the parking brake is applied ∙ When the brakes are operated by the driver 5-74 Starting and driving When the SET– switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set. Vehicle detected ahead When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by controlling the throttle and applying the brakes to match the speed of a slower vehicle ahead. The system then controls the vehicle speed based on the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the driver selected distance. A warning chime will sound and a message will pop up: ∙ When the VDC system is off (To use the ICC system, turn on the VDC system. Push the ICC switch to turn off the ICC system and reset the ICC switch by pushing the ICC switch again.) NOTE: For additional information about the VDC system, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in this section. ∙ When ABS or VDC is operating ∙ When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC system, make sure the wheels are no longer slipping.) 1 䊊 2 䊊 LSD3103 System set display with vehicle ahead System set display without vehicle ahead The driver sets the desired vehicle speed based on the road conditions. The ICC system maintains the set vehicle speed, similar to standard cruise control, as long as no vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. The ICC system displays the set speed. ∙ The stop lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the ICC system. ∙ When the brake operates, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction. When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator comes on. The ICC system will also display the set speed and selected distance. Vehicle ahead not detected When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC system then maintains the set speed. Starting and driving 5-75 When a vehicle is no longer detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off. How to change the set vehicle speed If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to the set vehicle speed or any time the ICC system is in operation, the system controls the distance to that vehicle. To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following methods: ∙ Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out. When a vehicle is no longer detected under approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the system will be canceled. ∙ Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out. ∙ Turn the ICC switch off. The ICC indicators will go out. LSD3267 When passing another vehicle, the set A will flash when the vespeed indicator 䊊 hicle speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle detect indicator will turn off when the area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed. Even though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC system, you can depress the accelerator pedal when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle rapidly. 5-76 Starting and driving To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following methods: ∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET– switch. ∙ Push and hold the RES+ switch. The set vehicle speed will increase by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h). ∙ Push, then quickly release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h). To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following methods: ∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET– switch and release it. ∙ Push and hold the SET– switch. The set vehicle speed will decrease by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h). ∙ Push, then quickly release the SET– switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h). To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (32 km/h). LSD2683 LSD2752 How to change the set distance to the vehicle ahead The distance to the vehicle ahead can be selected at any time depending on the traffic conditions. A is switch 䊊 Each time the distance pushed, the set distance will change to long, middle, short and back to long again, in that sequence. Distance Approximate distance at 60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)] 1. Long 200 (60) 2. Middle 150 (45) 3. Short 100 (30) ∙ The distance to the vehicle ahead will change according to the vehicle speed. The higher the vehicle speed, the longer the distance. ∙ If the engine is stopped, the set distance becomes “long.” (Each time the engine is started, the initial setting becomes “long.”) Starting and driving 5-77 Approach warning If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the driver with the chime and ICC system display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if: ∙ The chime sounds. ∙ The vehicle ahead detection indicator blinks. The warning chime may not sound in some cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Some examples are: ∙ When the vehicles are traveling at the same speed and the distance between vehicles is not changing. ∙ When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between vehicles is increasing. ∙ When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle. 5-78 Starting and driving The warning chime will not sound when: ∙ The vehicle approaches other vehicles that are parked or moving slowly. ∙ The accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system. NOTE: Automatic cancellation A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled: ∙ When the vehicle ahead is not detected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) The approach warning chime may sound and the system display may blink when the ICC sensor detects objects on the side of the vehicle or on the side of the road. This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The ICC sensor may detect these objects when the vehicle is driven on winding roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or when entering or exiting a curve. In these cases you will have to manually control the proper distance ahead of your vehicle. ∙ When the system judges the vehicle is at a standstill Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some damage). ∙ When a wheel slips ∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) position or Manual mode ∙ When the parking brake system is applied ∙ When the VDC system is turned off ∙ When VDC operates ∙ When distance measurement becomes impaired due to adhesion of dirt or obstruction to the sensor ∙ When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE LIMITATIONS WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the ICC system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. ∙ The ICC system is primarily intended for use on straight, dry, open roads with light traffic. It is not advisable to use the ICC system in city traffic or congested areas. ∙ The ICC system will not adapt automatically to road conditions. This system should be used in evenly flowing traffic. Do not use the system on roads with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in heavy rain or in fog. ∙ As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely on the ICC system. This system does not correct careless, inattentive or absentminded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles. ∙ The system may not detect the vehicle in front of you in certain road or weather conditions. To avoid accidents, never use the ICC system under the following conditions: ∙ If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will cancel once it judges that the vehicle has come to a standstill and sound a warning chime. To prevent the vehicle from moving, the driver must depress the brake pedal. – When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the bumper around the distance sensor ∙ Always pay attention to the operation of the vehicle and be ready to manually control the proper following distance. The ICC system may not be able to maintain the selected distance between vehicles (following distance) or selected vehicle speed under some circumstances. – On roads where the traffic is heavy or there are sharp curves – On slippery road surfaces such as on ice or snow, etc. – During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) – On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may go beyond the set vehicle speed and frequent braking may result in overheating the brakes) – On repeated uphill and downhill roads – When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent acceleration or deceleration Starting and driving 5-79 – Interference sources by other radar ∙ Do not use the ICC system if you are towing a trailer. The system may not detect a vehicle ahead. ∙ In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or object can unexpectedly come into the sensor detection zone and cause automatic braking. Always stay alert and avoid using the ICC system where not recommended in this warning section. The radar sensor will not detect the following objects: ∙ Stationary and slow moving vehicles ∙ Pedestrians or objects in the roadway ∙ Oncoming vehicles in the same lane ∙ Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane The sensor generally detects the signals returned from the vehicle ahead. Therefore, if the sensor cannot detect the reflection from the vehicle ahead, the ICC system may not maintain the selected distance. 5-80 Starting and driving The following are some conditions in which the sensor cannot properly detect a vehicle ahead and the system may not operate properly: ∙ When snow or road spray from traveling vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection. ∙ When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc. ∙ When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or cargo area of your vehicle. The ICC system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s operation within the limitations of the system. When the sensor is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the system will automatically be canceled. If the sensor is covered with ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC system may not detect them. In these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to check and clean the sensor regularly. The detection zone of the radar sensor is limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection mode to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead. A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection zone due to its position within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the centerline of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane. If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver may have to manually control the proper distance away from vehicle traveling ahead. SSD0252 Starting and driving 5-81 SSD0253 When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under construction, the radar sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause the radar system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. 5-82 Starting and driving If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead. SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE The following are conditions in which the ICC system may be temporarily unavailable. In these instances, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead. Condition A Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled. A chime will sound and the system will not be able to be set: ∙ When the VDC system is turned off ∙ When the VDC operates ∙ When a vehicle ahead is not detected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) ∙ When the system judges the vehicle is at a standstill ∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or Manual mode ∙ When the parking brake is applied ∙ When a wheel slips LSD2832 ∙ When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted Starting and driving 5-83 Action to take Condition C When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off using the ICC switch. Turn the ICC system back on to use the system. When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light (orange) and display the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” message. Condition B When the radar sensor of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the ICC system will automatically be canceled. The chime will sound and the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. Action to take: When the above driving conditions no longer exist, turn the system back on. LSD2685 Action to take Condition D If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. When the ICC system is not operating properly, a chime sounds and the ICC system warning light (orange) will come on. 5-84 Starting and driving ∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction. ∙ Do not alter, remove, or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Radio frequency statement For USA FCC ID OAYARS4B LSD3105 LSD2690 Action to take SYSTEM MAINTENANCE If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving and set the ICC system again. A is located The sensor for the ICC system 䊊 on the front of the vehicle. If it is not possible to set the system or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. To keep the ICC system operating properly, be sure to observe the following: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ∙ Always keep the sensor area clean. FCC Warning ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. ∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction. Starting and driving 5-85 For Canada Model: ARS4–B IC: 4135A-ARS4B FCC ID: OAYARS4B This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: 1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. 5-86 Starting and driving Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Information: This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body. The transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements IC établies pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps. FCC Notice Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed) CRUISE CONTROL MODE This mode allows driving at a speed between 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. WARNING ∙ In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, a warning chime does not sound to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle ahead, as neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. ∙ Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur. ∙ Always confirm the setting in the ICC system display. ∙ Do not use the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode when driving under the following conditions: – When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed – In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed – On winding or hilly roads – On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.) – In very windy areas ∙ Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident. LSD3271 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control switches 1. CANCEL switch: Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed 2. RES+ switch: Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally 3. ICC switch: Master switch to activate the system 4. SET- switch: Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally LSD3268 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display and indicators The display is located in the vehicle information display. 1. Cruise indicator: This indicator indicates the condition of the ICC system depending on a color. ∙ Cruise control ON indicator (gray): Indicates that the ICC switch is on ∙ Cruise control SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set Starting and driving 5-87 ∙ Cruise control warning (yellow): Indicates that there is a malfunction in the ICC system ing the ICC switch again will turn the system completely off. When the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position, the system is also automatically turned off. 2. Set vehicle speed indicator: This indicator indicates the set vehicle speed. For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h. To use the ICC system again, quickly push and release the ICC switch (vehicle-to vehicle distance control mode) or push and hold it (conventional cruise control mode) again to turn it on. CAUTION LSD3556 Operating conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, push and hold the ICC A for longer than about 1.5 secswitch 䊊 onds. When pushing ICC switch on, the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode B are displayed in display and indicators 䊊 the vehicle information display. After you hold ICC switch on for longer than about 1.5 seconds, the ICC system display turns off. The cruise indicator appears. You can now set your desired cruising speed. Push- 5-88 Starting and driving To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the ICC switch off when not using the ICC system. To cancel the preset speed, use any of the following methods: To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: 1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off. 1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET- switch and release it. 2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off. 3. Turn the ICC switch off. Both the cruise indicator and vehicle speed indicator will turn off. To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: LSD3557 To set cruising speed, accelerate your veC hicle to the desired speed, push the SET- 䊊 switch and release it. (The color of the cruise indicator changes to green and set vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed. ∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed. 1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET- switch. 2. Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, release the switch. 2. Push and hold the SET- switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed. 3. Push, then quickly release the SETswitch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h). 3. Push, then quickly release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). ∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, manually maintain vehicle speed. Starting and driving 5-89 System temporarily unavailable A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled: ∙ When the vehicle slows down more than 8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed ∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or manual shift mode ∙ When the parking brake is applied ∙ When the VDC operates (including the traction control system) ∙ When a wheel slips When the system is not operating properly, the chime sounds and the color of the cruise indicator will change to orange. Action to take If the color of the cruise indicator changes to orange, stop the vehicle in a safe place and place the shift lever in the P (Park) position. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving, and then perform the setting again. LSD2684 5-90 Starting and driving PROPILOT ASSIST (if so equipped) If it is not possible to set or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the ProPILOT Assist system could result in serious injury or death. ∙ ProPILOT Assist is not a self-driving system. Within the limits of its capabilities, as described in this manual, it helps the driver with certain driving activities. ∙ The ProPILOT Assist system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to correct careless, inattentive or absentminded driving. ProPILOT Assist will not always steer the vehicle to keep it in the lane. The ProPILOT Assist system is not designed to prevent loss of control. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times. ∙ There are limitations to the ProPILOT Assist system capability. The ProPILOT Assist system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather, and road conditions. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times. ∙ The ProPILOT Assist system is only an aid to assist the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. ∙ The ProPILOT Assist system is for highway use only and is not intended for city driving. Failure to apply the brakes or steer the vehicle when necessary may result in a serious accident. ∙ Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them. ∙ Never take your hands off the steering wheel when driving. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and drive your vehicle safely. ∙ Never unfasten your safety belt when using ProPILOT Assist. Doing so automatically cancels the ProPILOT Assist system. Starting and driving 5-91 centered in the traveling lane when clear lane markings are detected. ∙ The ProPILOT Assist system does not react to stationary and slow moving vehicles. ∙ Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ProPILOT Assist system. Read and understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the ProPILOT Assist system. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle’s speed in emergency situations. Do not use the ProPILOT Assist system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions. LSD2799 The ProPILOT Assist system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction. The ProPILOT Assist system uses a multiA installed behind sensing front camera 䊊 the windshield and a radar sensor located B to measure on the front of the vehicle 䊊 the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane and to monitor the lane markers. If the vehicle detects a slower moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the selected distance. The system will also help keep the vehicle 5-92 Starting and driving 1 䊊 2 䊊 3 䊊 4 䊊 Steering-wheel-mounted control (left) Vehicle information display Steering-wheel-mounted control (right) ProPILOT Assist switch PROPILOT ASSIST SYSTEM OPERATION The ProPILOT Assist system has the following two functions: 1. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) The ICC system can be set to one of two cruise control modes: ∙ Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode: For cruising at a preset speed NOTE: Steering Assist is not available in the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode. LSD2800 ∙ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: The ICC system maintains a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you within the speed range of 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144 km/h) up to the set speed. The set speed can be se- Starting and driving 5-93 lected by the driver between 20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h). When the vehicle ahead slows to a stop, your vehicle gradually decelerates to a standstill. When the vehicle is stopped, the ICC system maintains braking force to keep your vehicle stopped. NOTE: When your vehicle is stopped for less than 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead begins to move, your vehicle will start moving again automatically. – When your vehicle is at a standstill for more than 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead begins to accelerate, push the RES+ switch or lightly depress the accelerator pedal. The ICC system starts to follow the vehicle ahead. – When no vehicle is detected ahead within the driver selected distance, the vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The speed must be above 20 mph (32 km/h) to use this function. 5-94 Starting and driving NOTE: Even if the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) setting is turned off by the driver using the “Settings” menu in the vehicle information display, AEB will be automatically turned on when ICC is used. 2. Steering Assist The Steering Assist function controls the steering system to help keep your vehicle within the traveling lane. When there is no vehicle ahead, Steering Assist is not available at speeds under 37 mph (60 km/h). LSD3272 ProPILOT Assist switches 1 䊊 DISTANCE switch: – Long – Middle – Short 2 䊊 RES+ switch: Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally 3 䊊 CANCEL switch: Deactivates the ProPILOT Assist system – Lane marker indicator (yellow): Lane departure is detected 2 䊊 Set distance indicator Displays the selected distance 3 䊊 Vehicle ahead detection indicator Indicates whether the system detects a vehicle in front of you 4 䊊 Steering Assist indicator Indicates the status of the Steering Assist function by the color of the indicator 4 䊊 LSD2807 ProPILOT Assist switch: Turns the ProPILOT Assist system on or off 5 䊊 SET- switch: Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally 䊊 6 LSD3110 – Steering Assist indicator Steering Assist standby The ProPILOT Assist system display and indicators 1 䊊 – Steering Assist indicator (green): Steering Assist active Lane marker indicator Indicates whether the system detects lane markers Steering Assist switch: – No lane markers displayed: Steering Assist is turned off Turns the Steering Assist function on or off – Lane marker indicator (gray): No lane markers detected (gray): – Steering Assist indicator (orange): Steering Assist malfunction 5 䊊 ProPILOT Assist activation Displays once the ProPILOT Assist system is activated – Lane marker indicator (green): Lane markers detected Starting and driving 5-95 6 䊊 Steering Assist status indicator/ warning – Speed control status indicator/ ): ICC (diswarning (solid green tance control mode) is active (vehicle detected ahead). Your vehicle matches the speed of the vehicle ahead. Displays the status of the Steering Assist by the color of the indicator/ warning – No Steering Assist status indicator displayed: Steering Assist is turned off – Steering Assist indicator Steering Assist standby – Speed control status indicator/ ): ICC warning (green outline (maintain speed control mode) is active (no vehicle detected ahead). Your vehicle maintains the driverselected set speed. (gray): – Steering Assist indicator (green): Steering Assist active – Speed control status indicator/warning (orange): Indicates an ICC malfunction – Steering Assist indicator (orange): Steering Assist malfunction 7 䊊 Speed control warning status indicator/ Displays the status of speed control by the color and shape of the indicator/warning – Speed control status indicator/ warning (gray): ICC standby 8 䊊 Set vehicle speed indicator Indicates the set vehicle speed 9 䊊 ProPILOT Assist status indicator Indicates the status of the ProPILOT Assist system by the color of the indicator – ProPILOT Assist status indicator (white): ProPILOT Assist is on but in standby. – ProPILOT Assist status indicator (blue): ProPILOT Assist active 5-96 Starting and driving TURNING THE CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed) CRUISE CONTROL MODE ON NOTE: ProPILOT Assist provides no approach warnings, automatic braking, or steering assist in the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode. To choose the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, push and hold the ProPILOT Assist switch for longer than approximately 1.5 seconds. For additional information, refer to “Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode” in this section. LSD3311 1. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) 2. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) when shaded and Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) when solid 3. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) LSD3111 OPERATING PROPILOT ASSIST A . 1. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch 䊊 This turns on the ProPILOT Assist system. 2. A screen is displayed for a period of time that indicates the status of the driving aid functions. – AEB, LDW, and BSW are enabled when the specified driving aid is shaded. – I-LI is enabled when the driving aid is solid. LSD3074 – To change the status of the driving 2 1 or 䊊 butaids, use the 䊊 ton to navigate the settings screen. For additional information, refer to “How to use the vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. 3. The status of the ProPILOT Assist system is displayed in the vehicle informaB. tion display 䊊 4. Accelerate or decelerate your vehicle to the desired speed. Starting and driving 5-97 C . The ProPILOT 5. Push the SET- switch 䊊 Assist system begins to automatically maintain the set speed. The ProPILOT D and ProAssist activation indicator 䊊 E illumiPILOT Assist status indicator 䊊 nate (blue). When a vehicle ahead is traveling at a speed of 20 mph (32 km/h) or below and the SET- switch is pushed, the set speed of your vehicle is 20 mph (32 km/h). LSD3112 NOTE: When “Prevention (LDP)” is selected in the settings menu, turning the ProPILOT Assist system (if so equipped) on will activate the I-LI system at the same time. If “Prevention (LDP)” is not selected in the settings menu, I-LI will automatically activate when the ProPILOT Assist system is “SET.” For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in this section. LSD2826 When the SET- switch is pushed under the following conditions, the ProPILOT Assist system cannot be set and the set vehicle 1 blinks for approximately speed indicator 䊊 2 seconds: ∙ When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is not detected ∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) position or manual shift mode ∙ When the parking brake is applied ∙ When the brakes are operated by the driver 5-98 Starting and driving ∙ When the VDC system is off. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in this section. To change to a slower cruising speed: ∙ Push and hold the SET- switch. The set vehicle speed decreases by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h). ∙ When the VDC system (including the traction control system) is operating ∙ Push, then quickly release, the SETswitch. Each time you do this, the set speed decreases by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h). ∙ When a wheel is slipping ∙ When any door is open How to momentarily accelerate or decelerate ∙ When the driver’s seat belt is not fastened LSD3113 How to change the set vehicle speed The set vehicle speed can be adjusted. To change to a faster cruising speed: ∙ Push and hold the RES+ switch. The set vehicle speed increases by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h). ∙ Depress the accelerator pedal when acceleration is required. Release the accelerator pedal to resume the previously set vehicle speed. ∙ Depress the brake pedal when deceleration is required. Control by the ProPILOT Assist system is canceled. Push the RES+ switch to resume the previously set vehicle speed. ∙ Push, then quickly release, the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed increases by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h). Starting and driving 5-99 WARNING When the accelerator pedal is depressed and you are approaching the vehicle ahead, the ICC system will neither control the brake nor warn the driver with the chime and display. The driver must manually control the vehicle speed to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead. Failure to do so could result in severe personal injury or death. NOTE: When you accelerate by depressing the accelerator pedal or decelerate by pushing the SET- switch and the vehicle travels faster than the speed set by the driver, the set speed vehicle indicator will blink. LSD3114 How to change the set distance to the vehicle ahead The distance to the vehicle ahead can be selected at any time. A is Each time the DISTANCE switch 䊊 pushed, the set distance will change to long, middle, short and back to long again in that sequence. 5-100 Starting and driving Distance Approximate distance at 60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)] 1. Long 200 (60) 2. Middle 150 (45) 3. Short 90 (30) ∙ The distance to the vehicle ahead changes automatically according to the vehicle speed. The higher the vehicle speed, the longer the distance. ∙ If the engine is stopped, the set distance becomes “long.” (Each time the engine is started, the initial setting becomes “long.”) LSD2806 Starting and driving 5-101 1. Steering-wheel-mounted control (left) 2. Vehicle information display 3. Steering Assist switch HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE STEERING ASSIST Use the following methods to enable or disable the Steering Assist. Steering Assist switch: To turn the Steering Assist on or off, push the Steering Assist switch (3) on the instrument panel. NOTE: ∙ When the Steering Assist switch is used to turn the system on or off, the system remembers the setting even if the ignition switch is cycled. The switch must be pushed again to change the setting to on or off. ∙ The Steering Assist switch changes the status of the “Steering Assist” selection made in the “Settings” screen in the vehicle information display. LSD2813 5-102 Starting and driving Setting in the vehicle information display: How to cancel the ProPILOT Assist system button on the steering 1. Press the wheel (1) until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display (2). To cancel the ProPILOT Assist system, use one of the following methods: button (1) to select “Driver 2. Use the Assistance.” Then press the OK button (1). ∙ Tap the brake pedal (except at a standstill). button (1) to select “Driv3. Use the ing Aids.” Then press the OK button (1). 4. Select “Steering Assist” and press the OK button (1). NOTE: ∙ When the Cruise screen is displayed on the vehicle information display, press the OK button on the steering wheel to call up the “Driving Aids” setting display. ∙ When enabling/disabling the system through the vehicle information display or when pushing the Steering Assist switch, the system retains the current settings even if the engine is restarted. ∙ Push the CANCEL switch. ∙ Push the ProPILOT Assist switch to turn the system off. The ProPILOT Assist status indicator will go out. When the ProPILOT Assist system is canceled while the vehicle is stopped, the electronic parking brake is automatically activated. WARNING To prevent the vehicle from moving or rolling unexpectedly, which could result in serious personal injury or property damage, before exiting the vehicle make sure to push the ProPILOT Assist switch to turn the system off, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC) (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the ICC system could result in serious injury or death. ∙ The ICC system is only an aid to assist the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is recommended for highway use only and it is not intended for city driving. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times. ∙ There are limitations to the ICC system capability. The ICC system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather, and road conditions. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times. ∙ Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them. Starting and driving 5-103 ∙ The ICC system does not react to stationary and slow moving vehicles. ∙ Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ICC system. Read and understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the ICC system. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle’s speed in emergency situations. Do not use the ICC system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions. ICC system operation The ICC system is designed to maintain a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you and can reduce the speed to match a slower vehicle ahead. The system decelerates the vehicle as necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC system can only apply up to 40% of the vehicle’s total braking power. This system should only be used when traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant or when vehicle speeds change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer be- 5-104 Starting and driving cause the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC system sounds a warning chime and blinks the system display to notify the driver to take necessary action. The ICC system cancels and a warning chime sounds if the speed is below approximately 15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle is not detected ahead. The ICC system operates as follows: ∙ When there are no vehicles traveling ahead, the ICC system maintains the speed set by the driver. The set speed range is between approximately 20 and 90 mph (32 and 144 km/h). ∙ When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, the ICC system adjusts the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. Once your vehicle stops, the ICC system keeps the vehicle stopped. ∙ When your vehicle is stopped for less than 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead begins to move, your vehicle will start moving again automatically. ∙ When your vehicle is at a standstill for more than 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead begins to accelerate, push the RES+ switch or lightly depress the accelerator pedal. The ICC system starts to follow the vehicle ahead. ∙ When the vehicle traveling ahead moves to a different traveling lane, the ICC system accelerates and maintains vehicle speed up to the set speed. The ICC system does not control vehicle speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles ahead when approaching toll gates or traffic congestion. Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle ahead, the system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress the accelerator to properly accelerate your vehicle when acceleration is required for a lane change. Depress the brake pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead due to sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when using the ICC system. SSD0254 When driving on the freeway at a set speed and approaching a slower traveling vehicle ahead, the ICC system adjusts the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, the ICC system accelerates and maintains the speed up to the set speed. Pay attention to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed. LSD3115 System set display with no vehicle detected ahead No vehicle detected ahead The driver sets the desired vehicle speed based on the road conditions. The ICC system maintains the set vehicle speed, similar to standard cruise control, as long as no vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. The ICC system displays the set speed. The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, you will have to manually control the vehicle speed. Starting and driving 5-105 NOTE: ∙ The stop lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the ICC system. ∙ When the brake is applied by the system, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction. LSD3116 System set display with vehicle ahead Vehicle detected ahead When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by controlling the throttle and applying the brakes to match the speed of a slower vehicle ahead. The ICC system then controls the vehicle speed based on the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the driver selected distance. When your vehicle is stopped and the vehicle ahead begins to accelerate, push the RES+ switch or lightly depress the accelerator pedal. The ICC system starts to follow the vehicle ahead. Vehicle ahead not detected When the ICC system detects a vehicle ahead, the vehicle ahead detection indicator and the speed control status indicator (distance control mode) illuminates (solid ). green When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC system then maintains the set speed. Vehicle ahead stops When the vehicle ahead decelerates to stop, your vehicle decelerates to a standstill. Once your vehicle stops, the ICC system automatically applies the brakes to keep the vehicle stopped. When your vehicle is at a standstill, the “(RES+) Press to start” message is displayed on the vehicle information display. When a vehicle is no longer detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off and speed control status indicator (maintain speed control mode) illuminates ). (green outline The ICC system gradually accelerates to the set speed, but you can depress the accelerator pedal to quickly accelerate. When a vehicle is no longer detected and your vehicle is traveling under approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the ICC system automatically cancels. NOTE: When your vehicle stops for less than 3 seconds, your vehicle will automatically follow the vehicle as it accelerates from a stop. 5-106 Starting and driving Vehicle ahead accelerates Approach warning If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the driver with the chime and ICC system display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if: ∙ The chime sounds. ∙ The vehicle ahead detection indicator and set distance indicator blink. LSD3267 When passing another vehicle, the set A flashes when the vespeed indicator 䊊 hicle speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off when the area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the pedal is released, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed. Even though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC system, you can depress the accelerator pedal when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle rapidly. ∙ You judge it necessary to maintain a safe distance. The warning chime may not sound in some cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Some examples are: ∙ When the vehicles are traveling at the same speed and the distance between vehicles is not changing. ∙ When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between vehicles is increasing. ∙ When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle. The warning chime will not sound when: ∙ Your vehicle approaches other vehicles that are parked or moving slowly. ∙ The accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system. NOTE: The approach warning chime may sound and the system display may flash when the radar sensor detects objects on the side of the vehicle or on the side of the road. This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The radar sensor may detect these objects when the vehicle is driven on winding, narrow, or hilly roads or when the vehicle is entering or exiting a curve. In these cases, you will have to manually control the proper distance ahead of your vehicle. Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle conditions (for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some damage). Starting and driving 5-107 ICC system limitations WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the ICC system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death: ∙ The ICC system is primarily intended for use on straight, dry, open roads with light traffic. It is not advisable to use the ICC system in city traffic or congested areas. ∙ The ICC system will not adapt automatically to road conditions. This system should be used in evenly flowing traffic. Do not use the system on roads with sharp curves or on icy roads, in heavy rain or in fog. ∙ As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely on the ICC system. This system does not correct careless, inattentive or absentminded driving or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles. ∙ The system may not detect the vehicle in front of you in certain road or weather conditions. To avoid accidents, never use the ICC system under the following conditions: ∙ When the ICC system automatically brings the car to a stop, your vehicle can automatically accelerate if the vehicle is stopped for less than approximately 3 seconds. Be prepared to stop your vehicle if necessary. – When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the bumper around the distance sensor ∙ Always pay attention to the operation of the vehicle and be ready to manually control the proper following distance. The ICC system may not be able to maintain the selected distance between vehicles (following distance) or selected vehicle speed under some circumstances. – On roads with heavy, high-speed traffic or sharp curves – On slippery road surfaces such as on ice or snow, etc. – During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) – On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may go beyond the set vehicle speed and frequent braking may result in overheating the brakes) – On repeated uphill and downhill roads – When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent acceleration or deceleration – Interference sources. 5-108 Starting and driving by other radar ∙ Do not use the ICC system if you are towing a trailer. The system may not detect a vehicle ahead. ∙ In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or object can unexpectedly come into the sensor detection zone and cause automatic braking. Always stay alert and avoid using the ICC system where not recommended in this warning section. The ICC system will not detect the following objects: ∙ Stationary or slow moving vehicles ∙ Pedestrians or objects in the roadway ∙ Oncoming vehicles in the same lane ∙ Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane The following are some conditions in which the radar sensor cannot properly detect a vehicle ahead and the system may not operate properly: ∙ When the sensor detection is reduced (conditions such as rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sandstorms, and road spray from other vehicles) ∙ Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves ∙ Driving on a bumpy road surface, such as an uneven dirt road ∙ If dirt, ice, snow or other material is covering the radar sensor area ∙ A complicated-shaped vehicle such as a car carrier trailer or flatbed truck/trailer is near the vehicle ahead. ∙ Interference by other radar sources ∙ When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc. ∙ When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or cargo area of your vehicle. The ICC system is designed to automatically check the radar sensor’s operation within the limitations of the system. The detection zone of the radar sensor is limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the ICC system to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead. A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection zone due to its position within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the center line of the lane. A vehicle that is en- tering the lane ahead may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane. If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver may have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead. The ICC system (with ProPILOT Assist) uses a multi-sensing front camera. The following are some conditions in which the camera may not properly detect a vehicle and detection of a vehicle ahead may be delayed: ∙ Poor visibility (conditions such as rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sandstorms, and road spray from other vehicles) ∙ The camera area of the windshield is fogged up or covered with dirt, water drops, ice, snow, etc. ∙ Strong light (for example, sunlight or high beams from oncoming vehicles) enters the front camera ∙ A sudden change in brightness occurs (for example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or shaded area or lightning flashes) Starting and driving 5-109 SSD0252 5-110 Starting and driving Condition A Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled. A chime will sound and the system will not be able to be set: ∙ Any door is open. ∙ The driver’s seat belt is not fastened. ∙ The vehicle ahead is not detected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). SSD0253 When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under construction, the radar sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause the radar system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead. Automatic cancellation The following are conditions in which the ICC system may be temporarily unavailable. In these instances, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead. ∙ Your vehicle has been stopped by the ICC system for approximately 3 minutes or longer. ∙ The shift lever is not in the D (Drive) position or manual shift mode. ∙ The electronic parking brake is applied. ∙ The VDC system is turned off. ∙ The AEB applies harder braking. ∙ VDC (including the traction control system) operates. ∙ A wheel slips. ∙ When distance measurement becomes impaired due to adhesion of dirt or obstruction to the sensor. Starting and driving 5-111 ∙ When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted. ∙ When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted. Action to take: Condition B When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off using the ProPILOT Assist switch. Turn the ProPILOT Assist system back on to use the system. When the radar sensor of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the ICC system will automatically be canceled. NOTE: When the ICC system is canceled under the following conditions at a standstill, the electronic parking brake is automatically activated: ∙ Any door is open. ∙ The driver’s seat belt is not fastened. ∙ Your vehicle has been stopped by the ICC system for approximately 3 minutes or longer. ∙ The shift lever is not in the D (Drive) position or manual shift mode. ∙ The VDC system is turned off. ∙ When distance measurement becomes impaired due to adhesion of dirt or obstruction to the sensor. 5-112 Starting and driving The chime will sound and the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. Action to take: If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Condition C When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light and display the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” message. Action to take: When the above driving conditions no longer exist, turn the system back on. ICC system malfunction If the ICC system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, and the speed control status warning (orange) will illuminate. Action to take: If the warning light comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine and set the ICC system again. If it is not possible to set the ICC system or the indicator stays on, it may be a malfunction. Although the normal driving can be continued, the ICC system should be inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ICC sensor maintenance ∙ Always keep the windshield clean. The radar sensor is located on the front of the vehicle. ∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit. To keep the ICC system operating properly, be sure to observe the following: ∙ Always keep the sensor area clean. ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor. ∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction. ∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction. ∙ Do not alter, remove, or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. The camera sensor is located above the inside mirror. ∙ Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit’s capability of detecting the lane markers. ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. STEERING ASSIST WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Steering Assist could result in serious injury or death. ∙ The Steering Assist is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to correct careless, inattentive or absent-minded driving. The Steering Assist will not always steer the vehicle to keep it in the lane. It is not designed to prevent loss of control. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times. ∙ As there is a performance limit to the Steering Assist’s capability, never rely solely on the system. The Steering Assist does not function in all driving, traffic, weather, and road conditions. Always drive safely, pay attention to the operation of the vehicle, and manually control your vehicle appropriately. ∙ The Steering Assist is intended for use on well-developed freeways or highways with gentle (moderate) curves. To avoid risk of an accident, do not use this system on local or non-highway roads. To keep the proper operation of the systems and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following: Starting and driving 5-113 ∙ The Steering Assist only steers the vehicle to maintain its position in the center of a lane. The vehicle will not steer to avoid objects in the road in front of the vehicle or to avoid a vehicle moving into your lane. ∙ It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times. Never take your hands off the steering wheel when driving. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and drive your vehicle safely. ∙ Always drive carefully and attentively when using the Steering Assist. Read and understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the Steering Assist. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle’s speed in emergency situations. Do not use the Steering Assist except in appropriate road and traffic conditions. 5-114 Starting and driving Steering Assist operation The Steering Assist controls the steering system to help keep your vehicle near the center of the lane when driving. The Steering Assist is combined with the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist)” in this section. The Steering Assist can be activated when the following conditions are met: ∙ The ICC system is activated. ∙ Lane markers on both sides are clearly detected. ∙ A vehicle ahead is detected (when the vehicle is driven at speeds under 37 mph [60 km/h]). ∙ The driver grips the steering wheel. ∙ The vehicle is driven at the center of the lane. ∙ The turn signals are not operated. ∙ The windshield wiper is not operated in the low (LO) or high (HI) speed operation (the Steering Assist function is disabled after the wiper operates for approximately 10 seconds). LSD3118 Steering Assist display and indicators 1 䊊 Steering Assist status indicator/ warning Displays the status of the Steering Assist by the color of the indicator/warning ∙ Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steering Assist standby ∙ Steering Assist indicator (green): Steering Assist active ∙ Steering Assist indicator (yellow): Steering Assist malfunction 2 䊊 Steering Assist indicator Indicates the status of the Steering Assist by the color of the indicator ∙ Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steering Assist standby ∙ Steering Assist indicator (green): Steering Assist active 3 䊊 Lane marker indicator Indicates whether the system detects the lane marker ∙ Lane marker indicator (gray): Lane markers not detected ∙ Lane marker indicator (green): Lane markers detected ∙ Lane marker indicator (yellow): Lane departure is detected When the Steering Assist deactivates, the 1 , the Steering Assist status indicator 䊊 2 , and the lane Steering Assist indicator 䊊 3 on the vehicle informarker indicator 䊊 mation display turn gray and a chime sounds twice. Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) When a curve or strong cross wind exceeds the capabilities of the Steering Assist and your vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, a warning chime sounds and the I-LI indicator light (orange) on the instrument panel flashes to alert the driver. Then, the I-LI system automatically applies the brakes for a short period of time to help assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane. This action is in addition to any Steering Assist actions. When the Steering Assist is in operation, 1 , the the Steering Assist status indicator 䊊 2 , and the lane Steering Assist indicator 䊊 3 on the vehicle informarker indicator 䊊 mation display turn green. A chime sounds when the Steering Assist initially activates. Starting and driving 5-115 Hands on detection When the Steering Assist is activated, it monitors the driver’s steering wheel operation. If the steering wheel is not operated or the driver takes his/her hands off the steering wheel for a period of time, the warning (1) appears in the vehicle information display. If the driver does not operate the steering wheel after the warning has been displayed, an audible alert sounds and the warning flashes in the vehicle information display, followed by a quick brake application to request the driver to take control of the vehicle again. If the driver still does not respond, the ProPILOT Assist turns on the hazard flasher and slows the vehicle to a complete stop. The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by steering, braking, accelerating, or operating the ProPILOT Assist switch. LSD3119 5-116 Starting and driving WARNING Steering Assist is not a system for a hands-free driving. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and drive your vehicle safely. Failure to do so could cause a collision resulting in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: If the driver lightly touches (instead of firmly grips) the steering wheel, the steering torque sensor may not detect the driver’s hand(s) on the wheel and a sequence of warnings may occur. When the driver holds and operates the steering wheel again, the warnings turn off. Steering Assist limitations WARNING ∙ In the following situations, the camera may not detect lane markers correctly or may detect lane markers incorrectly and the Steering Assist may not operate properly: – When driving on roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers, lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly, nonstandard lane markers, or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc. ∙ Do not use the Steering Assist under the following conditions because the system may not properly detect lane markers. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident. – When driving on roads with discontinued lane markers – During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, dust, etc.) – When driving on roads with a widening or narrowing lane width – When rain, snow, sand, etc., is thrown up by the wheels of other vehicles – When driving on roads where there are multiple lanes or unclear lane markers due to road construction – When driving on roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams, or lines remaining after road repairs (the Steering Assist could detect these items as lane markers) – When driving on roads where the traveling lane merges or separates – When dirt, oil, ice, snow, water, or another object adheres to the camera unit – When the lens of the camera unit is foggy – When strong light (for example, sunlight or high beams from oncoming vehicles) shines on the camera – When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or the headlights are off in tunnels or darkness – When a sudden change in brightness occurs (for example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or is under a bridge) Starting and driving 5-117 – When driving on roads where the traveling lane merges or separates or where there are temporary lane markers because of road construction – When there is a lane closure due to road repairs – When driving on a bumpy road surface, such as an uneven dirt road – When driving on sharp curves or winding roads – When driving on repeated uphill and downhill roads ∙ Do not use the Steering Assist under the following conditions because the system will not operate properly: – When driving with a tire that is not within normal tire conditions (for example, tire wear, abnormal tire pressure, installation of a spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard wheels) – When the vehicle is equipped with non-original brake or suspension parts 5-118 Starting and driving – When an object such as a sticker or cargo obstructs the camera Steering Assist temporary standby – When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or luggage area of your vehicle Automatic standby due to driving operation: – When the vehicle load capacity is exceeded – When towing a trailer or other vehicle ∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the beep may not be heard. ∙ For the ProPILOT Assist system to operate properly, the windshield in front of the camera must be clean. Replace worn wiper blades. The correct size wiper blades must be used to help make sure the windshield is kept clean. Only use Genuine NISSAN wiper blades, or equivalent wiper blades, that are specifically designed for use on your vehicle model and model year. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the correct parts for your vehicle. When the driver activates the turn signal, the Steering Assist is temporarily placed in a standby mode. (The Steering Assist restarts automatically when the operating conditions are met again.) Automatic standby: In the following cases, a warning message is displayed along with the chime, and the Steering Assist is placed in a temporary standby mode. (The Steering Assist restarts automatically when the operating conditions are met again.) ∙ When lane markers on both sides are no longer detected ∙ When a vehicle ahead is no longer detected under approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) Steering Assist cancel Under the following conditions, the Steering Assist cancels, and the Steering Assist status indicator and the Steering Assist indicator turn off: ∙ When unusual lane markers appear in the traveling lane or when the lane marker cannot be correctly detected for some time due to certain conditions (for example, a snow rut, the reflection of light on a rainy day, the presence of several unclear lane markers) ∙ When the windshield wiper operates in the low (LO) or high (HI) speed operation (the Steering Assist is disabled when the wiper operates for more than approximately 10 seconds) Action to take: Turn the ICC system off using the CANCEL switch. When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the ICC system on again. Steering Assist malfunction When the system malfunctions, it turns off automatically. The Steering Assist status warning illuminates (orange). A chime may sound depending on the situation. Action to take: Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving, and set the Intelligent Cruise Control sys- tem again. If the warning (orange) continues to illuminate, the Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Steering Assist maintenance FCC ID OAYARS4B The camera sensor is located above the inside mirror. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: To keep the proper operation of the system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and ∙ Always keep the windshield clean. ∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit. ∙ Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit’s capability of detecting the lane markers. Radio frequency statement For USA 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC Warning Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit. Starting and driving 5-119 For Canada Model: ARS4–B IC: 4135A-ARS4B FCC ID: OAYARS4B This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes: 1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. 5-120 Starting and driving Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Information: CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed) CRUISE CONTROL MODE This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. NOTE: This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body. The transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Cet equipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements IC etablies pour un environnement non controle. Cet equipement doit etre installe et utilise avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps. FCC Notice Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. ProPILOT Assist provides no approach warnings, automatic braking, or steering assist in the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode. This mode allows driving at a speed between 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. WARNING ∙ In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, a warning chime does not sound to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle ahead, as neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. ∙ Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur. ∙ Always confirm the setting in the ICC system display. 4 䊊 ∙ Do not use the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode when driving under the following conditions: SET- switch: Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally – When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed – In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed – On winding or hilly roads – On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.) – In very windy areas ∙ Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident. LSD3120 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control switches 1 䊊 2 䊊 3 䊊 RES+ switch: Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally CANCEL switch: Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed ProPILOT Assist switch: Turns the ProPILOT Assist system on or off Starting and driving 5-121 ∙ Cruise control SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set ∙ Cruise control warning (yellow): Indicates that there is a malfunction in the ICC system 2. Set vehicle speed indicator: This indicator indicates the set vehicle speed. For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h. LSD3106 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display and indicators The display is located in the vehicle information display. 1. Cruise indicator: This indicator indicates the condition of the ICC system depending on a color. ∙ Cruise control ON indicator (gray): Indicates that the ProPILOT Assist switch is on 5-122 Starting and driving LSD3094 Operating conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, push and hold the A for longer than ProPILOT Assist switch 䊊 about 1.5 seconds. When pushing the ProPILOT Assist switch on, the conventional (fixed speed) cruise B are control mode display and indicators 䊊 displayed in the vehicle information display. After you hold the ProPILOT Assist switch on for longer than about 1.5 seconds, the ICC system display turns off. The cruise indicator appears. You can now set your desired cruising speed. Pushing the ProPILOT Assist switch again will turn the system completely off. When the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position, the system is also automatically turned off. To cancel the preset speed, use any of the following methods: 1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off. 2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off. To use the ICC system again, quickly push and release the ProPILOT Assist switch (vehicle-to vehicle distance control mode) or push and hold it (conventional cruise control mode) again to turn it on. 3. Turn the ProPILOT Assist switch off. Both the cruise indicator and vehicle speed indicator will turn off. To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: CAUTION To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the ProPILOT Assist switch off when not using the ICC system. LSD3117 To set cruising speed, accelerate your veC hicle to the desired speed, push the SET- 䊊 switch and release it. (The color of the cruise indicator changes to green and set vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed. ∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed. 1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET- switch. 2. Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, release the switch. 3. Push, then quickly release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). ∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, manually maintain vehicle speed. Starting and driving 5-123 AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) (if so equipped) To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: 1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET- switch and release it. 2. Push and hold the SET- switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed. 3. Push, then quickly release the SETswitch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h). 5-124 Starting and driving WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the AEB system could result in serious injury or death. ∙ The AEB system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for the driver’s attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques. ∙ The AEB system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions. The AEB system can assist the driver when there is a risk of a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane. LSD2690 A The AEB system uses a radar sensor 䊊 located on the front of the vehicle to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane. 1. AEB emergency warning indicator 2. AEB system warning light AEB SYSTEM OPERATION The AEB system will function when your vehicle is driven at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the AEB system will firstly provide the warning to the driver by flashing the warning (yellow) in the vehicle information display and providing an audible alert. If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully after the warning, and the AEB system detects that there is still the possibility of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force. If the driver does not take action, the AEB system issues the second visual (flashing) (red) and audible warning. If the driver releases the accelerator pedal, then the system applies partial braking. If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the AEB system applies harder braking automatically. LSD3079 Starting and driving 5-125 While the AEB system is operating, you may hear the sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the AEB system is operating properly. NOTE: The vehicle’s brake lights come on when braking is performed by the AEB system. Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a forward collision or may help mitigate the consequences of a collision, should one be unavoidable. If the driver is handling the steering wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB system will function later or will not function. The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions: ∙ When the steering wheel is turned as far as necessary to avoid a collision. ∙ When the accelerator pedal is depressed. ∙ When there is no longer a vehicle detected ahead. 5-126 Starting and driving If the AEB system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the brakes are released. TURNING THE AEB SYSTEM ON/OFF Perform the following steps to turn the AEB systems ON or OFF. button until “Settings” 1. Press the displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select play. Use the “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the OK button. 4. Select “Front” and use the OK button to turn the system on or off. When the AEB system is turned off, the AEB system warning light illuminates. NOTE: The AEB system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted. LSD3333 Starting and driving 5-127 AEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the AEB system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. ∙ The AEB system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions. ∙ The radar sensor does not detect the following objects: – Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in the roadway. – Oncoming vehicles. – Crossing vehicles. ∙ The radar sensor has some performance limitations. If a stationary vehicle is in the vehicle’s path, the AEB system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 50 mph (80 km/h). ∙ The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions: – Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering the radar sensor. 5-128 Starting and driving – Interference sources. by other radar – Snow or road spray from traveling vehicles. – If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g., motorcycle). – When driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves. ∙ In some road or traffic conditions, the AEB system may unexpectedly apply partial braking. When acceleration is necessary, continue to depress the accelerator pedal to override the system. ∙ Braking distances increase on slippery surfaces. ∙ The system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of obstructions of the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regularly. ∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard. SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE Condition A When the radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the AEB system is automatically turned off. The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the AEB system will resume automatically. Condition B When the radar sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the AEB system will automatically be canceled. The chime will sound and the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. Action to take LSD2717 If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the Starting and driving 5-129 front bumper and restart the engine. If the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Condition C When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light and display the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” message. Action to take If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the AEB system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. LSD2690 Action to take SYSTEM MAINTENANCE When the above driving conditions no longer exist, turn the system back on. A is located on the front of the The sensor 䊊 vehicle. SYSTEM MALFUNCTION To keep the system operating properly, be sure to observe the following: If the AEB system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display. ∙ Always keep the sensor area of the front bumper clean. ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor. ∙ Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction. 5-130 Starting and driving ∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction. For Canada ∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. IC: 4135A-ARS4B Radio frequency statement For USA FCC ID OAYARS4B This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC Warning Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Model: ARS4–B Radio frequency radiation exposure information: FCC ID: OAYARS4B This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body. 1. This device may not cause interference, and This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements IC établies pour un environnement non contrôlé. Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps. 1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. FCC Notice Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Starting and driving 5-131 AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION (if so equipped) WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system could result in serious injury or death. ∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for the driver’s attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques. ∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions. The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system can assist the driver when there is a risk of a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane or with a pedestrian ahead in the traveling lane. 5-132 Starting and driving LSD2799 The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system uses a radar sensor located on the front of B to measure the distance to the vehicle 䊊 the vehicle ahead in the same lane. For pedestrians, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system uses a camera installed beA in addition to the hind the windshield 䊊 radar sensor. 1. AEB with Pedestrian Detection emergency warning indicator 2. AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM OPERATION The AEB system operates at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). For the pedestrian detection function, the system operates at speeds between 6 – 37 mph (10 – 60 km/h). If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will firstly provide the warning to the driver by flashing the warning (yellow) in the vehicle information display and providing an audible alert. If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully after the warning, and the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system detects that there is still the possibility of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force. LSD3079 If the driver does not take action, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system issues the second visual (flashing) (red) and audible warning. If the driver releases the accelerator pedal, then the system applies partial braking. If the risk of a collision be- Starting and driving 5-133 comes imminent, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system applies harder braking automatically. While the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is operating, you may hear the sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is operating properly. NOTE: The vehicle’s brake lights come on when any braking is performed by the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a forward collision or may help mitigate the consequences if a collision should be unavoidable. If the driver is handling the steering wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will function later or will not function. 5-134 Starting and driving The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions: ∙ When the steering wheel is turned to avoid a collision. ∙ When the accelerator pedal is depressed. ∙ When there is no longer a vehicle or a pedestrian detected ahead. If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the brakes are released. TURNING THE AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM ON/OFF Perform the following steps to enable or disable the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. button until “Settings” 1. Press the displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select play. Use the “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the OK button. 4. Select “Front” and use the OK button to turn the system on or off. When the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is turned off, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light illuminates. NOTE: The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted. LSD3333 Starting and driving 5-135 AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. ∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system cannot detect all vehicles or pedestrians under all conditions. ∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system does not detect the following objects: – Small pedestrians (including small children), animals and cyclists. – Pedestrians in wheelchairs or using mobile transport such as scooters, child-operated toys, or skateboards. – Pedestrians who are seated or otherwise not in a full upright standing or walking position. – Oncoming vehicles 5-136 Starting and driving – Crossing vehicles – Obstacles on the roadside ∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system has some performance limitations. – If a stationary vehicle is in the vehicle’s path, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 50 mph (80 km/h). – For pedestrian detection, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) or below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). ∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will not function for pedestrians in darkness or in tunnels, even if there is street lighting in the area. ∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may not function if the vehicle ahead is narrow (for example, a motorcycle). ∙ The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may not function if the speed difference between the two vehicles is too small. ∙ The radar sensor AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may not function properly or detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions: – Poor visibility (conditions such as rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sandstorms, and road spray from other vehicles) – Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves. – Driving on a bumpy road surface, such as an uneven dirt road. – If dirt, ice, snow or other material is covering the radar sensor area. – Interference sources. by other radar – The camera area of the windshield is fogged up, or covered with dirt, water drops, ice, snow, etc. – Strong light (for example, sunlight or high beams from oncoming vehicles) enters the front camera. Strong light causes the area around the pedestrian to be cast in a shadow, making it difficult to see. – A sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or a shaded area or lightning flashes.) – The poor contrast of a person to the background, such as having clothing color or pattern which is similar to the background. – The pedestrian’s profile is partially obscured or unidentifiable due to the pedestrian transporting luggage, wearing bulky or very loosefitting clothing or accessories. ∙ The system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s (radar and camera) functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect blockage of sensor areas covered by ice, snow or stickers, for example. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear sensor areas regularly. ∙ In some road and traffic conditions, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may unexpectedly apply partial braking. When acceleration is necessary, depress the accelerator pedal to override the system. ∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard. ∙ The system performance may degrade in the following conditions: – The vehicle is driven on a slippery road. – The vehicle is driven on a slope. – Excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or the trunk room of your vehicle. Starting and driving 5-137 SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE Condition A: In the following conditions, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light blinks and the system will be turned off automatically: ∙ The radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source. ∙ The camera area of the windshield is misted or frozen. ∙ Strong light is shining from the front. ∙ The cabin temperature is over approximately 104°F (40°C) in direct sunlight. ∙ The camera area of the windshield glass is continuously covered with dirt, etc. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will resume automatically. LSD2717 5-138 Starting and driving NOTE: Condition C When the inside of the windshield on camera area is misted or frozen, it will take a period of time to remove it after the A/C turns on. If dirt appears on this area, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light and display the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” message. Condition B When the radar sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will automatically be canceled. The chime will sound and the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. Action to take If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Action to take When the above driving conditions no longer exist, turn the system back on. SYSTEM MALFUNCTION If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display. Action to take If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. LSD2799 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The radar sensor is located on the front of B . The camera is located on the vehicle 䊊 A . the upper side of the windshield 䊊 To keep the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system operating properly, be sure to observe the following: ∙ Always keep the sensor areas of the front bumper and windshield clean. ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensors (e.g., bumper, windshield). Starting and driving 5-139 ∙ Do not cover or attach stickers, or install any accessory near the sensors. This could block sensor signals and/or cause failure or malfunction. ∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the radar sensor (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction. ∙ Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit’s detection capability. ∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Radio frequency statement For USA FCC ID OAYARS4B This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 5-140 Starting and driving 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC Warning Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For Canada Model: ARS4–B IC: 4135A-ARS4B FCC ID: OAYARS4B This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: 1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. Radio frequency radiation exposure information: This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements IC établies pour un environnement non contrôlé. REAR AUTOMATIC BRAKING (RAB) (if so equipped) Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps. FCC Notice Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RAB system could result in serious injury or death. ∙ The RAB system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for proper driving procedures. Always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction you will move before and while backing up. Never rely solely on the RAB system. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times. ∙ There is a limitation to the RAB system capability. The RAB system is not effective in all situations. The RAB system can assist the driver when the vehicle is backing up and approaching objects directly behind the vehicle. LSD3334 The RAB system detects obstacles behind 1 the vehicle using the parking sensors 䊊 located on the rear bumper. NOTE: You can temporarily cancel the sonar function in the vehicle, but the RAB system will continue to operate. For additional information, please refer to “Rear Sonar System (RSS)” in this section. Starting and driving 5-141 1 䊊 2 䊊 3 䊊 RAB system warning light and RAB system warning indicator Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side) Center display (if so equipped) RAB SYSTEM OPERATION When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), the RAB system operates. If a risk of a collision with an obstacle is detected when your vehicle is backing up, the RAB system warning indicator will flash in the vehicle information display, a red frame will appear in the center display (for vehicles with the Intelligent Around View Monitor system), and the system will chime three times. The system will then automatically apply the brakes. After the automatic brake application, the driver must depress the brake pedal to maintain brake pressure. NOTE: ∙ The brake lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the RAB system. LSD3335 5-142 Starting and driving ∙ When the brakes operate, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction. TURNING THE RAB SYSTEM ON/OFF Perform the following steps to turn the RAB system ON or OFF. button until “Settings” 1. Press the displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select play. Use the “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the OK button. 4. To set the RAB system to on or off, use the OK button to check the box for “Rear.” When the RAB system is turned off, the RAB system warning light illuminates. NOTE: The RAB system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted. LSD3333 Starting and driving 5-143 RAB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the RAB system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RAB system could result in serious injury or death. ∙ When the vehicle approaches an obstacle while the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed, the function may not operate or the start of the operation may be delayed. The RAB system may not operate or may not perform sufficiently due to vehicle conditions, driving conditions, the traffic environment, the weather, road surface conditions, etc. Do not wait for the system to operate. Operate the brake pedal by yourself as soon as necessary. ∙ If it is necessary to override RAB operation, strongly press the accelerator pedal. ∙ Always check your surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before and while backing up. The RAB system detects stationary objects behind the vehicle. The RAB system does not detect the following objects: – Moving objects – Low objects – Narrow objects – Wedge-shaped objects – There is rain, snow, ice, dirt, etc., attached to the sonar sensors. – A loud sound is heard in the area around the vehicle. – The surface of the obstacle is diagonal to the rear of the vehicle. ∙ The RAB system may unintentionally operate in the following conditions: – Objects close to the bumper (less than approximately 1 ft [30 cm]) – There is overgrown grass in the area around the vehicle. – Objects that suddenly appear – There is a structure (e.g., a wall, toll gate equipment, a narrow tunnel, a parking lot gate) near the side of the vehicle. – Thin objects such as rope, wire, chain, etc. ∙ The RAB system may not operate for the following obstacles: – Obstacles located high off the ground – Obstacles in a position offset from your vehicle – Obstacles, such as spongy materials or snow, that have soft outer surfaces and can easily absorb a sound wave 5-144 Starting and driving ∙ The RAB system may not operate in the following conditions: – There are bumps, protrusions, or manhole covers on the road surface. – The vehicle drives through draped flag or a curtain. a – There is an accumulation of snow or ice behind the vehicle. – An ultrasonic wave source, such as another vehicle’s sonar, is near the vehicle. ∙ Once the automatic brake control operates, it does not operate again if the vehicle approaches the same obstacle. ∙ The automatic brake control can only operate for a short period of time. Therefore, the driver must depress the brake pedal. ∙ In the following situations, the RAB system may not operate properly or may not function sufficiently: – The vehicle is driven in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). – The vehicle is driven on a steep hill. – The vehicle’s posture is changed (e.g., when driving over a bump). – The vehicle is driven on a slippery road. – The vehicle is turned sharply by turning the steering wheel fully. – Snow chains are used. – Wheels or tires other than NISSAN recommended are used. – The brakes are cold at low ambient temperatures or immediately after driving has started. – The braking force becomes poor due to wet brakes after driving through a puddle or washing the vehicle. ∙ Turn the RAB system off in the following conditions to prevent the occurrence of an unexpected accident resulting from sudden system operation: – The vehicle is towed. – The vehicle is carried on a flatbed truck. – The vehicle is on the chassis dynamometer. – The vehicle drives on an uneven road surface. – Suspension parts other than those designated as Genuine NISSAN parts are used. (If the vehicle height or the vehicle body inclination is changed, the system may not detect an obstacle correctly.) ∙ Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, an open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard. SYSTEM MALFUNCTION If the RAB system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, the RAB system warning light will illuminate, and the “System fault” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. Action to take If the warning light illuminates, park the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off, and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the RAB system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. NOTE: If the RAB system cannot be operated temporarily, the RAB system warning light blinks. Starting and driving 5-145 BREAK-IN SCHEDULE ∙ Do not subject the area around the 1 to strong impact. parking sensors 䊊 Also, do not remove or disassemble the parking sensors. If the parking sensors and peripheral areas are deformed in an accident, etc., have the sensors checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ Do not install any stickers (including transparent stickers) or accessories on 1 and their surthe parking sensors 䊊 rounding areas. This may cause a malfunction or improper operation. LSD3334 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Observe the following items to ensure proper operation of the system: 1 ∙ Always keep the parking sensors 䊊 clean. ∙ If the parking sensors are dirty, wipe them off with a soft cloth while being careful to not damage them. 5-146 Starting and driving CAUTION During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance. ∙ Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm. ∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. ∙ Avoid quick starts. ∙ Avoid hard braking as much as possible. ∙ Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (805 kilometers). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy from your vehicle. ∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle due to increased aerodynamic drag. 1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake Pedal Application ∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabin when the A/C is on reduces cooling load. ∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops. ∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator and brake application whenever possible. ∙ Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible. 2. Maintain Constant Speed ∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate and minimize stops. ∙ Synchronizing your speed with traffic lights allows you to reduce your number of stops. ∙ Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and improve fuel efficiency. 3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher Vehicle Speeds ∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to open windows to cool the vehicle due to reduced engine load. 4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Distances ∙ Observing the speed limit and not exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where legally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due to reduced aerodynamic drag. ∙ Maintaining a safe following distance behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary braking. ∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate changes in speed permits reduced braking and smooth acceleration changes. ∙ Select a gear range suitable to road conditions. 5. Use Cruise Control ∙ Using cruise control during highway driving helps maintain a steady speed. ∙ Cruise control is particularly effective in providing fuel savings when driving on flat terrains. 6. Plan for the Shortest Route ∙ Utilize a map or navigation system to determine the best route to save time. 7. Avoid Idling ∙ Shutting off your engine when safe for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds saves fuel and reduces emissions. 8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads ∙ Automated passes permit drivers to use special lanes to maintain cruising speed through the toll and avoid stopping and starting. 9. Winter Warm Up ∙ Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel economy. ∙ Vehicles typically need no more than 30 seconds of idling at start-up to effectively circulate the engine oil before driving. ∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating temperature more quickly while driving versus idling. Starting and driving 5-147 INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY 10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool ∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parking area or in the shade whenever possible. ∙ When entering a hot vehicle, opening the windows will help to reduce the inside temperature faster, resulting in reduced demand on your A/C system. ∙ Keep your engine tuned up. ∙ Follow the recommended scheduled maintenance. ∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy. ∙ Keep all the wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy. ∙ Use the recommended viscosity engine oil. For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. 5-148 Starting and driving ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so equipped) If any malfunction occurs in the AWD system while the engine is running, the master warning light will come on. The master warning light may illuminate while trying to free a stuck vehicle due to high powertrain oil temperature. The driving mode may change to 2–Wheel Drive. AUTO mode may change to LOCK mode before the warning light illuminates. If the master warning light illuminates during operation, stop the vehicle with the engine idling in a safe place immediately. Then, if the light turns off after a while, you can continue driving. A large difference between the diameters of the front and rear wheels will make the warning light illuminate. Pull off the road in a safe area and idle the engine. Check that all tire sizes are the same, tire pressure is correct, and the tires are not worn. CAUTION ∙ If the warning light remains on after the above operation, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ If the warning light comes on while driving, there may be a malfunction in the AWD system. Reduce the vehicle speed and have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ The powertrain may be damaged if you continue driving with the warning light illuminated. ∙ Never drive on dry, hard surface roads in the LOCK mode, as this will overload the powertrain and may cause a serious malfunction. WARNING ∙ For AWD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. ∙ Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped vehicle on a 2–wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing) or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure that you inform the test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with AWD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. LIC2645 ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) LOCK SWITCH OPERATIONS The AWD LOCK switch is located on the lower side of the instrument panel. This switch is used to select the AUTO or LOCK mode depending on the driving conditions. LOCK mode: The AWD LOCK indicator light will illuminate. AUTO mode: The AWD LOCK indicator light will turn off. Starting and driving 5-149 AWD mode Wheels driven AUTO Distribution of torque to the front and rear wheels changes automatically, depending on road conditions encountered [100:0] ←→ [50:50]. This results in improved driving stability. *1 AWD LOCK indicator light Use conditions For driving on paved or slippery roads. AWD *2, *3 LOCK For driving on rough roads. *1 When the rotation difference between the front and rear wheels is large, the AWD mode may change from AUTO to LOCK for a while; however, this is not a malfunction. *2 The LOCK mode will change to AUTO mode automatically when the vehicle has been driven at a high speed. The AWD LOCK indicator light turns off. *3 LOCK mode will automatically be canceled when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. 5-150 Starting and driving ∙ The AWD torque distribution between the front and rear wheels can be displayed in the video information display. ∙ If the AWD LOCK switch is operated while accelerating or decelerating, or if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position, you may feel a jolt. This is normal. ∙ The oil temperature of the powertrain parts will increase if the vehicle is continuously operated under conditions where the difference in rotation between the front and rear wheels is large (wheel slip), such as when driving the vehicle on rough roads or through sand or mud or freeing a stuck vehicle. In these cases, the master warning light illuminates and the AWD mode changes to 2–Wheel Drive to protect the powertrain parts. Stop driving with the engine idling and wait until the warning light turns off and the AWD returns to the AUTO mode. If the warning light remains on, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS WARNING ∙ When driving straight, shift the AWD LOCK switch to AUTO. Do not operate the AWD LOCK switch when making a turn or backing up. ∙ Do not operate the AWD LOCK switch with the front wheel spinning. ∙ Engine idling speed is high while warming up the engine. Be especially careful when starting or driving on slippery surfaces. ∙ When turning the vehicle in LOCK mode on paved roads, you may feel a braking effect. This is a normal condition of the AWD model. WSD0050 WARNING ∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. ∙ Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park). Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal. ∙ Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended. Starting and driving 5-151 POWER STEERING ∙ Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. ∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets. 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. 2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated. 5-152 Starting and driving A : ∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 䊊 Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. B: ∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊 Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. ∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO C : CURB 䊊 Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves. 4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position. WARNING ∙ If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate. ∙ When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering. You will still have control of the vehicle, but the steering will be much harder to operate. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The power steering system is designed to provide power assistance while driving to operate the steering wheel with light force. When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or continuously while parking or driving at a very low speed, the power assist for the steering wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent overheating of the power steering system and protect it from getting damaged. While the power assist is reduced, steering wheel operation will become heavy. If the steering wheel operation is still performed, the power steering may stop and the power steering warning light will illuminate. In a safe location, stop BRAKE SYSTEM the engine and place the ignition switch in the OFF position. The temperature of the power steering system will go down after a period of time and the power assist level will return to normal after starting the engine. The power steering warning light will go off. Avoid repeating such steering wheel operations that could cause the power steering system to overheat. You may hear a noise from the front of the vehicle when the steering wheel is operated. This is a normal operational noise and is not a malfunction. If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering system is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, the power assist for the steering will cease operation but you will still have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steering efforts are required to operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds. The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at two wheels. BRAKE PRECAUTIONS Vacuum assisted brakes The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping distance will be longer. Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage. To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control. WARNING ∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident. ∙ If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder. Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly. Starting and driving 5-153 Parking brake break-in Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best braking performance. This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) WARNING ∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety. 5-154 Starting and driving ∙ Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness. – When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels. – When installing a spare tire, make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information, refer to “Tire and Loading Information label” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. – For additional information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-ityourself ” section of this manual. The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing each wheel from locking, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces. Using the system Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The Anti-lock Braking System will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles. WARNING Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances. Self-test feature The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) includes electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally but without anti-lock assistance. VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Normal operation The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) operates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road conditions. When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving. BRAKE ASSIST When the force applied to the brake pedal exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is activated generating greater braking force than a conventional brake booster even with light pedal force. WARNING The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times. The VDC system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain driving conditions, the VDC system helps to perform the following functions: ∙ Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a nonslipping drive wheel on the same axle. ∙ Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed (traction control function). ∙ Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle in the following conditions: – Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steering input) – Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to certain road or driving conditions) The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations. Starting and driving 5-155 When the VDC system operates, the indicator light in the instrument panel flashes so note the following: ∙ The road may be slippery or the system may determine some action is required to help keep the vehicle on the steered path. ∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly. ∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions. For additional information, refer to “Slip indicator light” and “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. If a malfunction occurs in the system, and indicator lights come the on in the instrument panel. The VDC system automatically turns off when these indicator lights are on. 5-156 Starting and driving The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the indicator light and if VDC system. The so equipped, the RAB system warning light, AEB system warning light or the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light illuminate to indicate the VDC, AEB, AEB with Pedestrian Detection and RAB systems are off. When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the system, the VDC system still operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by transferring power to a non-slipping drive indicator light flashes if wheel. The this occurs. All other VDC functions are off indicator light will not flash. and the The VDC system is automatically reset to on when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position then back to the ON position. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction. WARNING ∙ The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully. ∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and indicator light may flash or the and indicator both the lights may illuminate. ∙ If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly and both and the indicator lights the may illuminate. ∙ If engine control related parts are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, both the and indicator lights may illuminate. ∙ When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate indicator light properly and the and may flash or both the indicator lights may illuminate. Do not drive on these types of roads. ∙ When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or indicator light may ramp, the and indiflash or both the cator lights may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface. ∙ If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used, the VDC system may not operate indicator light properly and the and may flash or both the indicator lights may illuminate. ∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road. BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION During braking while driving through turns, the system optimizes the distribution of force to each of the four wheels depending on the radius of the turn. WARNING ∙ The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully. ∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and indicator light may flash or the and indicator both the lights may illuminate. ∙ If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly and both and the indicator lights the may illuminate. ∙ If engine control related parts are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, both the and indicator lights may illuminate. Starting and driving 5-157 CHASSIS CONTROL ∙ When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate indicator light properly and the and may flash or both the indicator lights may illuminate. Do not drive on these types of roads. The chassis control is an electric control module that includes the following functions: ∙ When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or indicator light may ramp, the and indiflash or both the cator lights may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface. INTELLIGENT TRACE CONTROL (I-TC) ∙ If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used, the VDC system may not operate indicator light properly and the and may flash or both the indicator lights may illuminate. The I-TC can be set to on (enabled) or off (disabled) through the vehicle information display “Settings” page. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. ∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road. 5-158 Starting and driving ∙ Intelligent Trace Control ∙ Intelligent Engine Brake ∙ Active Ride Control This system senses driving based on the driver’s steering and acceleration/braking patterns, and controls brake pressure at individual wheels to aid tracing at corners and help smooth vehicle response. When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC system, the I-TC is also turned off. INTELLIGENT ENGINE BRAKE (I-EB) The I-EB function adds subtle deceleration by controlling Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) gear ratio, depending on the cornering condition calculated from driver’s steering input and plural sensors. This benefit is for easier traceability and less workload of adjusting speed with braking at corners. The I-EB also enhances braking feel by adding subtle deceleration with CVT gear ratio control according to driver’s brake pedal operation LSD2185 When the I-TC is operated and the “Chassis Control” mode is selected in the vehicle information display, the I-TC graphics are shown in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. If the “Chassis Control System Error: See Owner’s Manual” warning message appears in the vehicle information display, it may indicate that the I-TC is not functioning properly. Have the system checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. WARNING The I-TC may not be effective depending on the driving condition. Always drive carefully and attentively. The I-EB can be set to on (enabled) or off (disabled) through the vehicle information display “Settings” page. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. When the I-TC is operating, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise. This is normal and indicates that the I-TC is operating properly. Even if the I-TC is turned off, some functions will remain on to assist the driver (for example, avoidance scenes). Starting and driving 5-159 ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL (ARC) This system senses upper body motion (based on wheel speed information) and controls engine torque and four wheel brake pressure. This will enhance ride comfort in effort to restrain uncomfortable upper body movement when passing over undulated road surfaces. This system comes into effect above 25 mph (40 km/h). When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC system, the ARC is also turned off. LSD2185 When the I-EB is operated at corners and the “Chassis Control” mode is selected in the vehicle information display, the I-EB graphics are shown in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. If the “Chassis Control System Error: See Owner’s Manual” warning message appears in the vehicle information display, it may indicate that the I-EB is not functioning properly. Have the system checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. 5-160 Starting and driving WARNING The I-EB may not be effective depending on the driving condition. Always drive carefully and attentively. When the I-EB is operating, the needle of the tachometer will rise up and you may hear an engine noise. This is normal and indicates that the I-EB is operating properly. HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM When the ARC is operating, you may hear noise and sense slight deceleration. This is normal and indicates that the ARC is operating properly. LSD2186 When brake control of ARC is operated and the “Chassis Control” mode is selected in the vehicle information display, the ARC graphics are shown in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. If the “Chassis Control System Error: See Owner’s Manual” warning message appears in the vehicle information display, it may indicate that the ARC is not functioning properly. Have the system checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. LSD2441 WARNING ∙ Never rely solely on the hill start assist system to prevent the vehicle from moving backward on a hill. Always drive carefully and attentively. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be especially careful when stopped on a hill on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death. Starting and driving 5-161 REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS) (if so equipped) ∙ The hill start assist system is not designed to hold the vehicle at a standstill on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll backwards and may result in a collision or serious personal injury. ∙ The hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards. Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury. When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hill start assist system automatically keeps the brakes applied. This helps prevent the vehicle from rolling backward in the time it takes the driver to release the brake pedal and apply the accelerator. Hill start assist will operate automatically under the following conditions: ∙ The shift lever is moved to a forward or reverse gear. ∙ The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill by applying the brake. 5-162 Starting and driving The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and hill start assist will stop operating completely. Hill start assist will not operate when the shift lever is moved to N (Neutral) or P (Park) or on a flat and level road. LSD3247 The RSS sounds a tone to inform the driver of obstacles near the bumper. When the “DISPLAY” key is on, the sonar view will automatically appear in the touch-screen display. An additional view of the sonar status will appear in the vehicle information display for reference. WARNING ∙ The RSS is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper parking. ∙ The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers. Always look around and check that it is safe to do so before parking. ∙ Read and understand the limitations of the RSS as contained in this section. The colors of the corner sonar indicator and the distance guide lines in the rear view indicate different distances to the object. ∙ Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck’s compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation. ∙ This function is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle. ∙ The system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. Always move slowly. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground. ∙ The system may not detect the following objects: fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass, wool, etc.; thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects. If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms. CAUTION ∙ Excessive noise (such as audio system volume or an open vehicle window) will interfere with the tone and it may not be heard. ∙ Keep the sonar sensors (located on the bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects. If the sensors are covered, the accuracy of the sonar function will be diminished. SYSTEM OPERATION The system informs with a visual and audible alert of rear obstacles when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position. Sonar Operation Table RR Sensor Range Sound P x Display † R o o N x † D x † o – Display/Beep when detect † – Display on camera view x – No Display and Beep The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. Starting and driving 5-163 The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds when an obstacle is detected by only the corner sensor and the distance does not change. The tone will stop when the obstacle gets away from the vehicle. When the object is detected, the indicator (green) appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermittently. When the vehicle moves closer to the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow and the rate of the blinking increases. When the vehicle is very close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns red, and the tone sounds continuously. LSD3246 When the corner of the vehicle moves closer to an object, the corner sonar indiA appears. When the center of the cator 䊊 vehicle moves close to an object, the cenB appears. ter sonar indicator 䊊 5-164 Starting and driving LSD2137 A will appear when The system indicators 䊊 the vehicle moves closer to an object. HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE SONAR SYSTEM The system is automatically activated when the ignition is in the ON position and the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position. Perform the following steps to enable or disable the sonar system: button until “Settings” 1. Press the displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select play. Use the “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button. 2. Select “Parking Aids” and press the OK button. 3. Select “Rear Sensor” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off. – Select “Display” to display the parking sensor in the vehicle information display when the sonar system activates. – Select “Range” to change the sonar system distance to “Far,” “Mid,” or “Near.” LSD3336 Starting and driving 5-165 SONAR LIMITATIONS WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the sonar system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. ∙ Read and understand the limitations of the sonar system as contained in this section. Inclement weather may affect the function of the sonar system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation. ∙ The system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. Always move slowly. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper or on the ground. ∙ The system may not detect the following objects: fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.; thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects. ∙ The system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects. ∙ The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE ∙ Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck’s compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation. When sonar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. 5-166 Starting and driving The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist. The sonar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sensors. Action to take: When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically. COLD WEATHER DRIVING Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the sonar sensors. Do not strike or damage the area around the sonar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the sonar sensors is damaged due to a collision. LSD3334 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE 1 are located on the The sonar sensors 䊊 rear bumper. Always keep the area near the sonar sensors clean. The sonar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sensors. FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole, or use the NISSAN Intelligent Key®. ANTIFREEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For additional information, refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Doit-yourself ” section of this manual. BATTERY If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For additional information, refer to “Battery” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual. Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the sonar sensors. Starting and driving 5-167 DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Changing engine coolant” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual. TIRE EQUIPMENT 1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information. 2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. 5-168 Starting and driving Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. 3. Tire chains may be used. For additional information, refer to “Tire chains” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual. SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter: ∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades. ∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support. ∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. ∙ Extra washer fluid to refill windshield-washer fluid reservoir. the DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE WARNING ∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or “grip” under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded. ∙ Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction. ∙ Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement. ∙ Allow greater following distances on slippery roads. ∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers. ∙ Do not use the cruise control (if so equipped) on slippery roads. ∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle. PARKING BRAKE For models equipped with electronic parking brake system CAUTION To keep the electronic parking brake released after the engine is turned off, refer to “Parking brake” in this section. CAUTION When parking in an area where the outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), the parking brake, if applied, may freeze in place and may be difficult to release. For safe parking, it is recommended that you place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and securely block the wheels. Starting and driving 5-169 MEMO 5-170 Starting and driving 6 In case of emergency Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Emergency engine shut off (push-button ignition models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF (push-button ignition models only) WARNING ∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road. ∙ Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic. ∙ Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on. LIC0394 Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash. 6-2 In case of emergency The flashers will operate with the ignition switch placed in any position. Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving. To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following procedure: ∙ Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch three consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or ∙ Push and hold the push-button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds. FLAT TIRE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) This vehicle is equipped with the TPMS. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the “Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For additional information, refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section, and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. WARNING ∙ Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use. ∙ If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services. ∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. ∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors. ∙ If the light still comes on while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. In case of emergency 6-3 CHANGING A FLAT TIRE If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below: Stopping the vehicle 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic. 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to P (Park). WARNING ∙ Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the shift lever is shifted into P (Park). ∙ Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous. ∙ Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance. 4. Turn off the engine. 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance. 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle. LCE2142 A. Blocks B. Flat tire Blocking wheels Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up. WARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury. 6-4 In case of emergency LCE2111 Getting the spare tire and tools Open the rear liftgate. Remove the DivideN-Hide® floor. For additional information, refer to “Divide-N-Hide® adjustable floor” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. LIC2640 1. The jack and tool kit are located in the storage compartment to the left. 2. Remove the storage door by pressing A simultanethe two release tabs 䊊 ously. LCE2437 B restraining the jack 3. Unhook the clips 䊊 and tool kit. 4. Remove the tool kit. Lift the floorboard. In case of emergency 6-5 LCE2247 WCE0188 5. Remove the jack by turning the spindle C counterclockwise, relieving the 䊊 pressure on the jack. 6. To loosen the bolt, turn counterclockwise. 7. Once loosened, remove the bolt. 8. Remove the spare tire. 9. Once the flat tire is exchanged with the spare tire, store the flat tire where the spare tire was located. 10. Turn the bolt clockwise to tighten. 6-6 In case of emergency LCE2109 Changing the spare tire with BOSE® sub-woofer (if so equipped) 1. To loosen the bolt, turn counterclockwise. 2. Once loosened, remove the bolt. Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or wheel surface. LCE2110 3. Place the sub-woofer in the upper right corner of the cargo space, leaning against the 2nd row passenger side seat. 4. Remove the spare tire. 5. Once the flat tire is exchanged with the spare tire, store the flat tire where the spare was located. 6. Place the sub-woofer inside the flat tire. 7. Turn the bolt clockwise to tighten. SCE0630 Removing wheel cover (if so equipped) CAUTION Do not use your hands to pry off wheel caps or wheel covers. Doing so could result in personal injury. To remove the wheel cover, use the jacking 1 . rod 䊊 2 between the wheel and Apply cloth 䊊 jacking rod to prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover. In case of emergency 6-7 Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire WARNING ∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. ∙ Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change. ∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support. ∙ Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. ∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack. LCE2380 ∙ Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials. ∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack. 6-8 In case of emergency ∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move. SCE0002 Always refer to the illustrations for the correct placement and jack-up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type. Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions. 1. Loosen each wheel nut 1 or 2 turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground. 2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. Align the jack head between the 2 notches in the front or the rear. Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches. The jack should be used on firm and level ground. 3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire. In case of emergency 6-9 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illusB ,䊊 C ,䊊 D ,䊊 E ). Lower the veA ,䊊 trated (䊊 hicle completely. 5. Securely store the jacking equipment in the vehicle. When storing the tool kit, it is requested to tighten the bag securely with the attached band to prevent movement of the tools, otherwise noise may occur. WCE0056 Installing the spare tire The spare tire is designed for emergency use. For additional information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub. 2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence illustrated until they are tight A ,䊊 B ,䊊 C ,䊊 D ,䊊 E ). (䊊 6-10 In case of emergency NOTE: You may need to remove the wheel cap in order to secure the damaged tire using the spare tire clamp. WARNING ∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident. ∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose. ∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque: 83 ft-lb (113 N·m) The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval. Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure. COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for 3 hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire and loading information label affixed to the driver side center pillar. JUMP STARTING To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed. WARNING ∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle. ∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery. ∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water. ∙ Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting. ∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury. ∙ Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it. ∙ Keep battery out of the reach of children. ∙ The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle. In case of emergency 6-11 CAUTION ∙ Always connect positive (⫹) to positive (⫹) and negative (⫺) to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery. ∙ Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal. WARNING Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury. 1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their batteries near each other. Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. 6-12 In case of emergency LCE2223 6. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes. 2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.). 7. Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started. 3. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position. 4. Ensure the vent caps (if so equipped) are level and tight. 5. Connect the jumper cables in the seA ,䊊 B ,䊊 C ,䊊 D ). quence illustrated (䊊 CAUTION Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again. 8. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable. PUSH STARTING CAUTION ∙ Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models cannot be push-started or tow-started. Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage. ∙ Do not push start this vehicle. The three-way catalyst may be damaged. IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS WARNING ∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire. ∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator or coolant reservoir cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury. ∙ Do not open the hood if steam is coming out. If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the following steps: 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park). Do not stop the engine. 2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed. 3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. If steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the engine. Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen. 4. Open the engine hood. WARNING If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned. 5. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine. WARNING Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time. In case of emergency 6-13 TOWING YOUR VEHICLE 6. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictional and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions: WARNING ∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed. ∙ Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck. CAUTION ∙ When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. If any of these conditions apply, dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used. ∙ Always attach safety chains before towing. 6-14 In case of emergency For additional information, refer to “Flat towing for All-Wheel drive vehicle” or “Flat towing for front wheel drive vehicle” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle based upon the type of drivetrain. For additional information, refer to the diagrams in this section to ensure that your vehicle is properly towed. LCE2238 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be used when towing your vehicle or place the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated. CAUTION Never tow All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models equipped with a Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) with any of the wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transfer case and transmission. In case of emergency 6-15 ∙ When towing Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models with the rear wheels on the ground or on towing dollies: LCE2239 Two-Wheel Drive models with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated. 6-16 In case of emergency CAUTION ∙ Never tow Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models with the front wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the front wheels. – Place the ignition switch in the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism (for models with a steering lock mechanism). VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle) WARNING To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when recovering a stuck vehicle: ∙ Contact a professional towing service to recover the vehicle if you have any questions regarding the recovery procedure. ∙ Tow chains or cables must be attached only to main structural members of the vehicle. ∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow or free a stuck vehicle. ∙ Only use devices specifically designed for vehicle recovery and follow the manufacturer’s instructions. ∙ Always pull the recovery device straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull at an angle. ∙ Route recovery devices so they do not touch any part of the vehicle except the attachment point. If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery device. Rocking a stuck vehicle WARNING ∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. ∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged. ∙ Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R (Reverse) and D (Drive). ∙ Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55 km/h). 5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle. If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure: 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system. 2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions. 3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires. 4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward. ∙ Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive). ∙ Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion. In case of emergency 6-17 MEMO 6-18 In case of emergency 7 Appearance and care Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . . Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 7-2 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-5 Power moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the seat tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-7 7-7 7-7 7-7 7-8 CLEANING EXTERIOR In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it. To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your vehicle as soon as you can: ∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain. ∙ After driving on coastal roads. ∙ When contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface. ∙ When dust or mud builds up on the surface. Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area. When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover. WASHING Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water. CAUTION ∙ Do not concentrate water spray directly on the sonar sensors (if so equipped) on the bumper as this will result in damage to the sensors. Do not use pressure washers capable of spraying water over 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) to wash your vehicle. Use of high-pressure washers over 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) can result in damage to or removal of paint or graphics. Avoid using a high-pressure washer closer than 12 inches (30 cm) to the vehicle. Always use a wide-angle nozzle only, keep the nozzle moving and do not concentrate the water spray on any one area. ∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This could affect their appearance, and also could cause them not to function properly. Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used. ∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents. ∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted. ∙ Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water. 7-2 Appearance and care Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots. WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is recommended to remove built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax. A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product. ∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax. ∙ Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish. Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. REMOVING SPOTS Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these products. UNDERBODY In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated. GLASS Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film. CAUTION When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements. ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so equipped) Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. If not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels. CAUTION Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels: ∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels. ∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot. The wheel temperature should be the same as ambient temperature. Appearance and care 7-3 CLEANING INTERIOR ∙ Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied. ∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is completely removed from the tire tread/grooves. CHROME PARTS ∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by the tire dressing manufacturer. Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish. TIRE DRESSINGS Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth. Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather (if so equipped). NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint. Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material. If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the following precautions: Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury. ∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating on the tire dissolves more easily than with an oil-based tire dressing. ∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove). 7-4 Appearance and care Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens. WARNING CAUTION ∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any similar material. ∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather’s natural finish. ∙ Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer. ∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover. AIR FRESHENERS Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener, take the following precautions: ∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface. ∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on the vents. These products can cause immediate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces. Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions before using the air fresheners. POWER MOONROOF (if so equipped) The sunshade is made from a tricot material. ∙ Clean water based stains by patting the surface with a clean soft cloth dampened in warm water. Press a clean dry cloth onto the surface to remove as much dampness as possible and then let air dry. ∙ Clean oil based stains by patting the surface with a clean soft cloth dampened in warm water. Press a clean dry cloth onto the surface to remove as much dampness as possible and then let air dry. CAUTION To help prevent damaging the moonroof while cleaning: ∙ Do not rub the material with a cloth. Doing so can damage the surface of the material or cause a stain to spread. ∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any similar chemical to clean the sunshade. This may discolor the moonroof and damage the surface. Appearance and care 7-5 ∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats, or equivalent floor mats, that are specifically designed for use in your vehicle model and model year. ∙ Properly position the mats in the floorwell using the floor mat positioning hook. For additional information, refer to "Floor mat installation" in this section. ∙ Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation. LAI2007 FLOOR MATS (if so equipped) WARNING To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision, injury or death: ∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front position or install them upside down or backwards. ∙ Periodically check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed. ∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior, check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed. The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn. Floor mat installation Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat positioning hook(s). The number and shape of 7-6 Appearance and care the floor mat positioning hooks for each seating position varies depending on the vehicle. When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats, follow the installation instructions provided with the mat and the following: 1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the shift lever in P (Park) position and with the parking brake fully applied, position the floor mat in the floorwell so that the floor mat grommet holes are aligned with the hook(s). 2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is properly positioned. 3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation. With the ignition still in the OFF position, the shift lever in the P (Park) position and with the parking brake applied, fully apply and release all pedals. The floor mat must not interfere with pedal operation or prevent the pedal from returning to its normal position. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details about installing the floor mats in your vehicle. CORROSION PROTECTION WARNING Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing. CLEANING THE SEAT TRACKS CAUTION Periodically clean the seat tracks to prevent reduction of ability to move the seats. LAI2046 Positioning hooks The illustration shows the location of the floor mat positioning hooks. SEAT BELTS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. For additional information, refer to “Seat belt maintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual. Clean periodically with a high-powered vacuum cleaner. Dirt and debris may reduce the ability to adjust the seat. A wet cleansing agent may be used if necessary. MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION Most vehicle corrosion is caused by: ∙ The accumulation of moistureretaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. ∙ Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic collisions. ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION Moisture Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion. Appearance and care 7-7 Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used. Temperature High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated. Air pollution Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use accelerates the corrosion process. Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces. PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION ∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean. ∙ Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible. ∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation. 7-8 Appearance and care ∙ Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible. CAUTION ∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom. ∙ Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them. Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. 8 Do-it-yourself Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Changing engine oil and oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 Windshield-washer fluid reservoir. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25 NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) . . . . . . 8-25 NISSAN jackknife key (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 8-27 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28 Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28 Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39 Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40 MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed. WARNING ∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the shift lever to P (Park). ∙ Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs. ∙ If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts. ∙ It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle. ∙ Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle. 8-2 Do-it-yourself ∙ Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan. ∙ If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape. ∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. ∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery. ∙ Because the fuel lines on gasoline engine models are under high pressure even when the engine is off, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines. CAUTION ∙ Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down. ∙ Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid. ∙ Never leave the engine or Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) related component harnesses disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position. ∙ Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position. This “Do-it-yourself ” section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform. You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, it is recommended that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer. ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS QR25DE engine 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Engine coolant reservoir Engine oil filler cap Brake fluid reservoir Battery Air cleaner Fuse/Fusible link box Radiator cap Engine oil dipstick Drive belt location Windshield-washer fluid reservoir * Engine cover removed for clarity. LDI2809 Do-it-yourself 8-3 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide year-round antifreeze and coolant protection. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary. WARNING ∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. For additional information on precautions, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. ∙ The radiator is equipped with a pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a Genuine NISSAN radiator cap. 8-4 Do-it-yourself CAUTION ∙ Never use any cooling system additives such as radiator sealer. Additives may clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system. ∙ When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is prediluted to provide antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). If additional freeze protection is needed due to weather where you operate your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concentrate following the directions on the container. If an equivalent coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system. ∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) (or equivalent coolant), including Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer to the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual. For additional information on the location of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “Engine compartment check locations” in this section. CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant. The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual. Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating. LDI2810 Type A (if so equipped) CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant B , add coolant level is below the MIN level 䊊 A . If the reservoir is empty, to the MAX level 䊊 check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX A . level 䊊 LDI3211 Type B (if so equipped) This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer to the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual. If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. WARNING ∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. ∙ Never remove the radiator or engine coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. ∙ Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. ∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of children and pets. Do-it-yourself 8-5 ENGINE OIL Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations. LDI2811 CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way. 8-6 Do-it-yourself LDI2812 5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H B . This is the (High) and L (Low) marks 䊊 normal operating oil level range. If the A , oil level is below the L (Low) mark 䊊 remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. C . Do not overfill 䊊 6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick. It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions. CAUTION Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty. CAUTION Make sure the correct lifting and support points are used to avoid vehicle damage. CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER For additional information on engine oil and oil filter change, refer to the instructions outlined in this section. Vehicle set-up 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 䊊 Oil filler cap LDI3417 1 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn the engine off and wait for 15 minutes. 4. Raise and support the vehicle using a suitable floor jack and safety jack stands. ∙ Place the safety jack stands under the vehicle jack-up points. ∙ A suitable adapter should be attached to the jack stand saddle. Do-it-yourself 8-7 䊊 Oil drain plug 2 8-8 Do-it-yourself LDI3418 䊊 Oil filter 3 LDI3350 䊊 Engine protector 4 LDI3382 CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot. WARNING ∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. ∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. LDI3385 Removal of engine protector A and engine protector. 1. Remove pins䊊 Engine oil and filter 1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug and oil filter. 2. Remove the oil filler cap. 3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil. ∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of children. 4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand. 5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag. CAUTION Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of the engine. Failure to do so could lead to an oil leak and engine damage. ∙ The dipstick must be inserted in place to prevent oil spillage from the dipstick hole when filling the engine with oil. 6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil. 7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten additionally more than 2/3 turn. Oil filter tightening torque: 11 to 15 ft-lb (14.7 to 20.6 N·m) 8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force. Drain plug tightening torque: 22 to 29 ft-lb (29.4 to 39.2 N·m) 9. Refill the engine with the recommended oil through the oil filler opening, and install the oil filler cap securely. For additional information about drain and refill capacity, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for ref- Do-it-yourself 8-9 CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID erence only. Always use the dipstick to determine the proper amount of oil in the engine. 10. Start the engine and check for leakage around the drain plug and the oil filter. Correct as required. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary. After the operation 1. Reinstall engine protectors in reverse order of removal. 2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground. 3. Reset oil and oil filter maintenance reminder. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. ∙ Dispose of waste oil and filter properly. ∙ Check your local regulations. BRAKE FLUID CAUTION ∙ NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. ∙ Do not use Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may also damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty. When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. LDI2815 WARNING ∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehicle’s stopping ability. ∙ Clean the filler cap before removing. ∙ Brake fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children. 8-10 Do-it-yourself WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir opening. CAUTION Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the surface with water. Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the B , the brake fluid is below the MIN line 䊊 brake warning light will illuminate. Add A . For addibrake fluid up to the MAX line 䊊 tional information on brake fluid type, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. If the brake fluid must be added frequently, the brake system should be thoroughly checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of windshield-washer fluid. LDI3130 WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid when the “Low Washer Fluid” warning message (if so equipped) shows on the vehicle information display or when there is no fluid in the dip tube. To check the fluid level with the dip tube, A of use your finger to plug the center hole 䊊 the cap/tube assembly, then remove it from the reservoir. If there is no fluid in the dip tube, add fluid. Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent. CAUTION ∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze coolant for windshield-washer fluid. This may result in damage to the paint. ∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do-it-yourself 8-11 ∙ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water. 8-12 Do-it-yourself BATTERY Caution symbols for battery 1 䊊 No smoking, No exposed flames, No Sparks WARNING Do not expose the battery to electrical sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury. 2 䊊 Shield eyes Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion or battery acid. 3 䊊 Keep away from children Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children. 4 䊊 Battery acid 5 䊊 Note operating instructions 6 䊊 Explosive gas Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or severe burns. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the battery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it could cause loss of your eyesight or burns. Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling. Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury. Do-it-yourself 8-13 ∙ If the battery is labeled "do not open" it is maintenance free and battery fluid should not be checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or a qualified specialist workshop to confirm the battery’s performance. ∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water. ∙ Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened. ∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge. NOTE: Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as: 1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.) 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances. 8-14 Do-it-yourself In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health. WARNING ∙ Do not expose the battery to flames, an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. ∙ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion. ∙ When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry. ∙ Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. ∙ Keep battery out of the reach of children. ∙ Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent caps tight and the battery level. LDI3302 LDI2817 Battery (Type A) (if so equipped) NOTE: Battery (Type B) (if so equipped) NOTE: Do not try to open the top of the battery. Do not try to open the top of the battery. The Type A battery is not equipped with removable vent caps. If low battery fluid is suspected, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The Type B battery is not equipped with removable vent caps. If low battery fluid is suspected, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. LDI3324 Battery (Type C) (if so equipped) For Type C batteries, check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the UPPER 1 and LOWER LEVEL䊊 2 lines. LEVEL 䊊 If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level to the indicator in each filler opening. Do not overfill. Do-it-yourself 8-15 VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM JUMP STARTING If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump starting” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. A . 1. Remove the cell plugs 䊊 LDI2854 2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER 1 line. If the side of the battery is LEVEL 䊊 not clear, check the distilled water level by looking directly above the cell; con1 indicates a correct fluid level dition 䊊 2 indicates that fluid and condition 䊊 needs to be added. A . 3. Tighten the cell plugs 䊊 Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. 8-16 Do-it-yourself LDI2178 CAUTION ∙ Do not ground accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. ∙ Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. Your vehicle is equipped with a variable A . This system voltage control system 䊊 measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator. DRIVE BELT The current sensor is located near the battery along the negative battery cable. If you add electrical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area. 1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced or adjusted. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. 2. Have the belt checked regularly for condition and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule found in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual. LDI2130 QR25DE engine 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Crankshaft pulley Drive belt automatic tensioner pulley Water pump pulley Generator pulley Air conditioner compressor pulley WARNING Be sure the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt. The engine could rotate unexpectedly. Do-it-yourself 8-17 SPARK PLUGS AIR CLEANER WARNING Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely. CAUTION Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs. If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. SDI1895 REPLACING SPARK PLUGS Iridium-tipped spark plugs It is not necessary to replace iridiumA spark plugs as frequently as contipped 䊊 ventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual. Do not service iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping. ∙ Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones. 8-18 Do-it-yourself LDI3139 The viscous paper type filter element should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance log shown in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual. To remove the air cleaner filter: A inward to 1. Pinch the retaining clips 䊊 B frontward, and reunlock, move tab 䊊 C upward. move air duct 䊊 NOTE: Do not bend retaining clips outward or they may break. NOTE: IN-CABIN MICROFILTER After installing a new air cleaner filter, make sure the air cleaner cover and air cleaner duct are seated correctly and all the retaining clips are latched. The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of airborne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors. The filter is located behind the glove box. For additional information, refer to the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual for change intervals. WARNING LDI3141 D and 2. Unlatch the retaining clips 䊊 E forward. move air cleaner cover 䊊 3. Remove air cleaner filter. Follow the removal instruction in reverse order to install air cleaner filter, air cleaner cover and air cleaner duct. ∙ Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops the flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed. If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury. Do-it-yourself 8-19 WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES CLEANING 2. Rapidly lift the windshield wiper and A upwards twice within washer lever 䊊 0.5 seconds. This action will cause the wipers to automatically take the service position. If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield-washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water. Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades. CAUTION Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision. 8-20 Do-it-yourself LDI2476 REPLACING Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. To replace the windshield wiper blades, follow the procedure below: 1. When ignition switch is ON or within 60 seconds after placing the ignition switch from the ON to OFF position, place the windshield wiper and washer lever into the OFF position. LDI2475 LDI2477 3. Once the wipers are in the service poB. sition, push the release tab 䊊 7. Finally, lift the windshield wiper and D washer lever to the mist position 䊊 once and release. This action will cause the wipers to resume the set position. C and re4. Move the wiper blade down 䊊 move. 5. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place. 6. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in the groove. CAUTION ∙ After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened. ∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure. LDI2820 If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle F . This may cause clogging or improper 䊊 windshield-washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or E . small pin 䊊 Do-it-yourself 8-21 BRAKES Rear window wiper blade If checking or replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Self-adjusting brakes Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes. The front and rear disc-type brakes selfadjust every time the brake pedal is applied. WARNING Have your brake system checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Brake pad wear indicators The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, a high pitched scraping or screeching sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard. 8-22 Do-it-yourself Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional information regarding brake inspections, refer to the appropriate maintenance schedule information in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual. FUSES Fusible links If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts. LDI2385 If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. Fuses are used in the passenger and engine compartment. Spare fuses are provided and can be found in the passenger compartment fuse box. When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely. LDI2840 ENGINE COMPARTMENT WARNING Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire If any electrical equipment does not come on, check for an open fuse. For checking and replacing fuses, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Do-it-yourself 8-23 LDI2821 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT WARNING Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire. If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. NOTE: The fuse box is located on the driver’s side of the instrument panel. 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF. 2. Remove the fuse box cover with a suitable tool. Use a cloth to avoid damaging the trim. 3. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced. 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller A . 䊊 8-24 Do-it-yourself LDI2760 B , replace it with an 5. If the fuse is open 䊊 C . equivalent good fuse 䊊 6. Push the fuse box cover to install. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired, It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. BATTERY REPLACEMENT NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so equipped) CAUTION Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts. Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as follows: 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. A 2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver 䊊 B of the corner and twist it into the slit 䊊 to separate the upper part from the lower part. Place a cloth over the screwdriver to protect the casing. LDI2001 Do-it-yourself 8-25 3. Replace the battery with a new one. Recommended battery: CR2032 or equivalent. ∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction. ∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity. ∙ Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of the lower part. 4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with C and 䊊 D. 䊊 5. Operate the buttons to check the operation. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for replacement. FCC Notice: LDI2637 8-26 Do-it-yourself For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For Canada: This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 3 䊊 Replace the battery with a new one. Recommended battery: CR2032 or equivalent. ∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction. ∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity. 4 䊊 Close lid securely as illustrated. Operate the buttons to check the operation. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for replacement. NOTE: NISSAN JACKKNIFE KEY (if so equipped) 1 䊊 Replace the battery in the jackknife key as follows: 2 䊊 LDI2354 Hold jackknife key button side up. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect the casing. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Remove old battery. Do-it-yourself 8-27 LIGHTS FCC Notice: HEADLIGHTS For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For additional information on headlight bulb replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section. The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. They can be replaced from inside the engine compartment without removing the headlight assembly. ∙ Only touch the base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass could significantly affect bulb life and/or headlight performance. For Canada: This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. If headlight bulb replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped. 8-28 Do-it-yourself Replacing the halogen headlight bulb (if so equipped) CAUTION ∙ Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ Do not leave the headlight assembly open without a bulb installed for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering the headlight body may affect bulb performance. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly just before a replacement bulb is installed. ∙ Use the same number and wattage as shown in the chart. Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing. Replacing the LED headlight bulb (if so equipped) If LED headlight bulb replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light for a long period of time as dust, moisture and smoke may enter the fog light body and affect the performance of the fog light. FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped) For additional information on fog light bulb replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section. Replacing the fog light bulb If bulb replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. CAUTION ∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped. ∙ When handling the bulb, do not touch the glass envelope. ∙ Use the same number and wattage as originally installed as shown in the chart. Do-it-yourself 8-29 EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS Item Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)* High Low Turn Side marker Daytime running lights/clearance lights* Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)* High Low Turn Side marker Daytime running lights/clearance lights* Fog lights (if so equipped)* Courtesy light* Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* Map light* Glove box light* Vanity mirror light (if so equipped) Room light (if so equipped) Personal lights (if so equipped) Cargo light* High-mounted stop light* Rear combination light* Stop Tail/Stop Turn Side marker Backup (reversing) assembly* Backup Tail License plate light* Wattage (W) Bulb No. 65 55 28/8 5 H9 H11 7444NA W5W — — — — 28/8 — — — 7444NA — — — 35 — — — 1.4 1.8 8 8 5 — H8 — — — — — — — — — 21 — 21 5 W21W — WY21W W5W 18 — 5 921 — W5W * It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement. Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information. 8-30 Do-it-yourself LDI3227 1. 2 3 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Headlight assembly Map light Personal light (if so equipped) Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped) Fog light (if so equipped) Daytime running light Room light (if so equipped) Cargo light High mounted stop light License plate light Backup (reversing) assembly Rear combination light Indicates bulb removal Indicates bulb installation WDI0263 Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp and/or cover. Do-it-yourself 8-31 WHEELS AND TIRES If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. TIRE PRESSURE Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) WARNING Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use. This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If equipped, the system also displays pressure of all tires (except the spare 8-32 Do-it-yourself tire) on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel. The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving). For additional information, refer to “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section and “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. Tire inflation pressure Check the tire pressures (including the spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label or the Tire and Loading Information label under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures should be checked regularly because: ∙ Most tires naturally lose air over time. ∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking. The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle for inflating the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure. For additional information, refer to “TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling. WARNING ∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident. ∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components. ∙ Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level. ∙ For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. Do-it-yourself 8-33 4 䊊 5 䊊 6 䊊 Tire and Loading Information label 1 䊊 2 䊊 Seating capacity: The maximum number of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle. Tire size - refer to “Tire labeling” in this section. 8-34 Do-it-yourself 3 䊊 LDI2737 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling, drivability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle’s GVWR. Original tire size: The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory. Spare tire size (if so equipped). Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Vehicle loading information” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. 3. Remove the gauge. 4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. LDI0393 Checking tire pressure 1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire. 5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed. 6. Install the valve stem cap. 7. Check the pressure of all other tires, including the spare. Size Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Front and Rear Original Tire: 225/65R17 102H Front and Rear Original Tire: 225/60R18 100H Front and Rear Original Tire: 225/55R19 99H Spare Tire: T155/90D17 101M Spare Tire: T145/90D16 106M 33 psi, 230 kPa 33 psi, 230 kPa 33 psi, 230 kPa 60 psi, 420 kPa 60 psi, 420 kPa 2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage. Do-it-yourself 8-35 WDI0394 Example TIRE LABELING Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the Tire Identification Number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall. 8-36 Do-it-yourself WDI0395 1 䊊 Example Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H) 1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles (not all tires have this information). 2. Three-digit number (215): This number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. 3. Two-digit number (65): This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of height to width. 4. R: The “R” stands for radial. 5. Two-digit number (15): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches. 6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This number is the tire’s load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by law. 7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating. LDI2786 Example 2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) 䊊 for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX XXXX) 1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department Of Transportation”. The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number. 2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identification mark. 3. Two-digit code: Tire size. 4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Optional). 5. Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003. If these numbers are missing then look on the other sidewall of the tire. Do-it-yourself 8-37 3 Tire ply composition and material 䊊 6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type” 䊊 The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester and others. Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”). 4 Maximum permissible inflation 䊊 pressure 7 The word “radial” 䊊 The word “radial” is shown if the tire has radial structure. 8 Manufacturer or brand name 䊊 This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure. Manufacturer or brand name is shown. 5 Maximum load rating 䊊 In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section, Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire. 8-38 Do-it-yourself Other Tire-related Terminology TYPES OF TIRES WARNING ∙ When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability. ∙ Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. ∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the low tire pressure warning system. ∙ For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. ∙ Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which can cause the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system to malfunction resulting in personal injury or death, excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission, transfer case and differential gears. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models CAUTION ∙ ONLY use spare tires specified for the AWD model. If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with tires of the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and corrected as necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. All season tires NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some models to provide good performance all year, including snowy and icy road condi- tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas. Summer tires NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall. If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. Snow tires If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. If you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. TIRE CHAINS Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are designed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire Do-it-yourself 8-39 Wheel nut tightening torque: 83 ft-lb (113 N·m) size. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected. Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress. The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval. ∙ WDI0258 ∙ CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). For additional information on tire replacing procedures, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. 8-40 Do-it-yourself ∙ ∙ WARNING After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure. Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation. For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. WDI0259 Tire wear and damage 1. Wear indicator 2. Location mark WARNING ∙ Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced. ∙ The original tires have built-in tread wear indicators. When the wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced. ∙ Tires degrade with age and use. Have tires, including the spare, over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury. ∙ Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. Replacing wheels and tires ing capacity as originally equipped. Recommended types and sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. WARNING ∙ The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury. ∙ For 2WD models, if your vehicle was originally equipped with four tires that were the same size and you are only replacing two of the four tires, install the new tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires on the front axle may cause loss of vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an accident and personal injury When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carry- Do-it-yourself 8-41 ∙ If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect the VDC system and/or interference with the brake discs. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. For additional information on wheel off-set dimensions, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. ∙ When replacing a wheel without the TPMS, such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. 8-42 Do-it-yourself ∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if it is not handled correctly. Be careful when handling the TPMS sensor. ∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the ID registration may be required. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for ID registration. ∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not specified by NISSAN. The valve stem cap may become stuck. ∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve may be clogged up with dirt and cause a malfunction or loss of pressure. ∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning. ∙ The use of retread tires is not recommended. ∙ For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. CAUTION Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which will cause excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission, transfer case and differential gears (AWD models). If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with tires of the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and corrected as necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Wheel balance Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required. Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage. ∙ For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. Care of wheels ∙ Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance. ∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed. Observe the following precautions if the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident: WARNING ∙ The spare tire should be used for emergency use only. It should be replaced with the standard tire at the first opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage. ∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels. ∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving. ∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. ∙ Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure. Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar). ∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter. ∙ With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire installed do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire) When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function. ∙ When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire should be used on the rear wheels and the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels). ∙ Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the standard tire. Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear. ∙ Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles. ∙ Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time. ∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. CAUTION ∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle. ∙ Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught. Do-it-yourself 8-43 MEMO 8-44 Do-it-yourself 9 Maintenance and schedules Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Explanation of general maintenance items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5 Emission control system maintenance:. . . . . . . 9-5 Chassis and body maintenance:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Additional Maintenance Items for severe operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Maintenance under severe operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Severe driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your vehicle good mechanical condition, as well as its emissions and engine performance. It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed. As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain. GENERAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE The maintenance items listed in this section are required to be serviced at regular intervals. However under severe driving conditions, additional or more frequent maintenance will be required. WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause or have it checked promptly. In addition, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required. GENERAL MAINTENANCE If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and serviced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-to-day operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures regularly as prescribed. NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up-to-date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips and training programs. They are fully qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before work begins. EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, it is recommended that you ask your NISSAN dealer where the nearest NISSAN Certified Collision Center is located, or go to http://collision.nissanusa.com. Outside the vehicle You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s service department can perform the service needed to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle. Doors and engine hood: Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make sure that the These checks or inspections can be done by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer. 9-2 Maintenance and schedules When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the “Maintenance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. Additional information on the following items with “ * ” is found in the “Do-ityourself ” section of this manual. The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently. Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim. Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary. Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) transmitter components: Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age. Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility. It is recommended that you have a damaged windshield repaired by a NISSAN dealer, or a NISSAN Certified Collision Center. To locate a collision center in your area, refer to http://collision.nissanusa.com. Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. Inside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal. Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop, have your vehicle checked immediately. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal. Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the shift lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes. Parking brake: Check the parking brake operation regularly. The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Maintenance and schedules 9-3 Seats: Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints/headrests move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. Steering wheel: Check for changes in the steering system, such as excessive free play, hard steering or strange noises. Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly. Windshield defroster: Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner. Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak. 9-4 Maintenance and schedules Under the hood and vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel). Battery (except for maintenance free batteries)*: Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. Battery (for maintenance free batteries)*: This vehicle is equipped with a sealed maintenance free battery. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service. NOTE: Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as: 1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.). 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances. In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health. Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir. Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. Engine drive belt*: Make sure the drive belt is not frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust system inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately. The following descriptions are provided to give you a better understanding of the scheduled maintenance items that should be regularly checked or replaced. The maintenance schedule indicates at which mileage/time intervals each item requires service. Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections. In addition to scheduled maintenance, your vehicle requires that some items be checked during normal day-to-day operation. For additional information, refer to “General maintenance” in this section. Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate. For additional information, refer to the “Appearance and care” section of this manual. Items marked with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. You are not required to perform maintenance on these items in order to maintain the warranties which come with your NISSAN. Other maintenance items and intervals are required. When applicable, additional information can be found in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual. NOTE: NISSAN does not advocate the use of non-OEM approved aftermarket flushing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on a NISSAN product. Many of the aftermarket flushing systems use non-OEM approved chemicals or solvents, the use of which has not been validated by NISSAN. For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids, grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE: Drive belt*: Check engine drive belt for wear, fraying or cracking and for proper tension. Replace any damaged drive belt. Engine air filter: Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, check/replace the filter more frequently. Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir. Maintenance and schedules 9-5 Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the specified interval. When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For additional information on the proper mixture for your area, refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.) NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the recommended service interval of the coolant. Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil and oil filter at the specified intervals. For recommended oil grade and viscosity refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. Engine valve clearance*: Inspect only if valve noise increase. Adjust valve clearance if necessary. Evaporative emissions control vapor lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary. 9-6 Maintenance and schedules Fuel filter*: Periodic maintenance is not required. (in-tank type filter) Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections for leaks, looseness, or deterioration. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary. Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals. Install new plugs of the same type as originally equipped. CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE: In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, replace the filter more frequently. Propeller shaft(s): Check for damage, looseness, and grease leakage. (AWD) Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts, drive shaft boots: Check for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil or grease. Under severe driving conditions, inspect more frequently. Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for proper installation. Check for chafing, cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately. Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) according to the instructions under “Explanation of general maintenance items” in this section. When rotating tires, check for damage and uneven wear. Replace if necessary. Brake pads and rotors: Check for wear, deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately. Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil, transfer case oil: Visually inspect for signs of leakage at specified intervals. Exhaust system: Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks, cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary. If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads: ∙ Replace the fluid/oil every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ∙ Replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or request the dealer to inspect the fluid deterioration data using a CONSULT. If the deterioration data is more than 210000, replace the CVT fluid. Off-Road Maintenance Check the following items frequently whenever you drive off-road through deep sand, mud or water: ∙ Brake pads and rotors ∙ Differential, transmission and transfer case oil ∙ Steering linkage ∙ Propeller shaft(s) and front drive shafts ∙ Engine air filter To help ensure smooth, safe and economical driving, NISSAN provides two maintenance schedules that may be used, depending upon the conditions in which you usually drive. These schedules contain both distance and time intervals, up to 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months. For most people, the odometer reading will indicate when service is needed. However, if you drive very little, your vehicle should be serviced at the regular time intervals shown in the schedule. After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/ 96 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals. ∙ Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. ∙ Operating in hot weather in stopand-go “rush hour” traffic. ∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use. ∙ Driving in dusty conditions. ∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread roads. ∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or using a car-top carrier. ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS FOR SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS Additional maintenance items for severe operating conditions should be performed on vehicles that are driven under especially demanding conditions. Additional maintenance items should be performed if you primarily operate your vehicle under the following conditions: ∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km). Maintenance and schedules 9-7 STANDARD MAINTENANCE The following tables show the standard maintenance schedule. Depending upon weather and atmospheric conditions, varying road surfaces, individual driving habits and vehicle usage, additional or more frequent maintenance may be required. After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time interval. STANDARD MAINTENANCE Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months Air cleaner filter Brake fluid夝 Brake lines and cables Brake pads and rotors夝 CVT fluid Drive belt Engine coolant* Engine oil & oil filter夝 EVAP vapor lines Exhaust system夝 Fuel filter Fuel lines In-cabin microfilter Intake & exhaust valve clearance* NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (AWD models)夝 Spark plugs Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts夝 Tire rotation Transfer fluid & differential gear oil NOTE (1) 9-8 Maintenance and schedules 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 30 (48) 24 R R I I I R R I* I I I I NOTE (2) NOTE (3) NOTE (4)(5) R R MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 (60) (72) (84) (96) (108) (120) (132) (144) (156) (168) (180) (192) 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 R R R R R R I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I* I* I* I* I* R R R R I* I R R R R I* I R R R R I* I NOTE (6) I* R R R I* R R I* R I* R R NOTE (7) I I I NOTE (8) I NOTE (9) NOTE (10) I I R R R I I I I Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) I I I I I I R I I I I I NOTE: Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to the “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”. (1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. (2) If using a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect) CVT fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km). It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. (3) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged. (4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months. (5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. (6) Periodic maintenance is not required. (7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance. (8) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.055 in (1.4 mm) even if within specified replacement mileage. (9) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to “General maintenance” in the section. (10) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 20,000 (32,000 km) or 24 months. * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required. Maintenance and schedules 9-9 MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table. SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS ∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km). ∙ Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. ∙ Operating in hot weather in stopand-go “rush hour” traffic. Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary. Maintenance item Brake fluid Brake pads & rotors Engine oil & oil filter Exhaust system Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (AWD models) Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts 9-10 Maintenance and schedules Maintenance operation Replace Inspect Replace Inspect Inspect Inspect ∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distance, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use. ∙ Driving in dusty conditions. ∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread roads. ∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or using a car-top carrier. Maintenance interval Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months MAINTENANCE LOG 7,500 Miles (12,000 km) or 6 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 12 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 22,500 Miles (36,000 km) or 18 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 24 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 37,500 Miles (60,000 km) or 30 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 36 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 52,500 Miles (84,000 km) or 42 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 48 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 67,500 Miles (108,000 km) or 54 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: Maintenance and schedules 9-11 75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 60 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 82,500 Miles (132,000 km) or 66 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 72 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 97,500 Miles (156,000 km) or 78 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 84 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 112,500 Miles (180,000 km) or 90 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 96 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: Miles ( Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: Miles ( Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 9-12 Maintenance and schedules km) or km) or Miles ( Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: km) or Miles ( Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: km) or Miles ( Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: km) or Miles ( Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: km) or Miles ( Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: km) or Miles ( Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: km) or Miles ( Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: km) or Miles ( Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: km) or Miles ( Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: km) or Maintenance and schedules 9-13 Miles ( Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: km) or 9-14 Maintenance and schedules Miles ( Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: km) or Miles ( Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: km) or MEMO Maintenance and schedules 9-15 10 Technical and consumer information Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Fuel recommendation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 When traveling or registering in another country. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Vehicle identification number (chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-11 Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Tire and Loading Information label . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Installing front license plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Flat towing for all–wheel drive vehicle (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Flat towing for front wheel drive vehicle (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Emission control system warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Additional Data Recording (on vehicles equipped with optional ProPILOT Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/ LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity. Capacity (approximate) Metric US Imperial Measure Measure Measure Fluid type Fuel 55 L 14-1/2 gal 12-1/8 gal With oil filter change 4.6 L 4-7/8 qt 4 qt Without oil filter change 4.3 L 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt 8.1 L 2-1/8 gal 1-3/4 gal Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — — Differential gear oil Transfer oil — — — — — — Brake fluid — — — Multi-purpose grease — — — Engine oil*1 Drain and refill *1: For additional information, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual. Engine coolant with reservoir 10-2 Technical and consumer information Recommended Fluids/Lubricants • For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in this section. • Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” (or equivalent) is recommended. • If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a synthetic 0W-20 GF-5 SN motor oil (or engine oil) may be used. Damage caused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty. For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in this section. • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent • Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 • NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or equivalent conventional (non-synthetic) oil • Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*2 or equivalent DOT 3 *2: Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer. • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base) Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Metric US Imperial Measure Measure Measure Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — Air conditioning system oil — — — Windshield-washer fluid 5L 1-3/8 gal 1-1/8 gal FUEL RECOMMENDATION Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91). CAUTION ∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door label can operate on E-85. Fuel system or other damage can occur if E-85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E-85. ∙ Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage. Recommended Fluids/Lubricants • HFC-134a (R-134a) • For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section. • NISSAN A/C System Oil Type ND-OIL8 or exact equivalents • For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section. • Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent ∙ Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst. ∙ Do not use a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol. Using a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in a vehicle not specifically designed for a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol can adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ∙ Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel containing MMT may adversely affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline. ∙ U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region. Technical and consumer information 10-3 Gasoline specifications NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance. Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications. Reformulated gasoline Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available. Gasoline containing oxygenates Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager. If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage. ∙ The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline. ∙ If an oxygenate-blend other than methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 15% oxygenate. ∙ If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles. If any driveability problems such as engine stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, 10-4 Technical and consumer information immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage. E–15 fuel E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified with small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region. E–85 fuel E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region. Fuel containing MMT Octane rating tips MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting additive. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may adversely affect vehicle performance, including the emissions control system. Note that while some fuel pumps label MMT content, not all do, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, it is recommended that you have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible. Aftermarket fuel additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine. However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load. Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing. Technical and consumer information 10-5 Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used. Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage. LTI2051 ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATIONS Selecting the correct oil It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in this section. NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy. Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi- cation or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API certification mark on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage. Oil additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed. 10-6 Technical and consumer information Selecting the correct oil filter Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in “Change intervals.” Change intervals The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incor- rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle. The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/C system oil Type ND-OIL8 or the exact equivalents. Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes: ∙ repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures ∙ driving in dusty conditions ∙ extensive idling ∙ towing a trailer ∙ stop and go commuting For additional information, refer to the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system. CAUTION The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components. The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant. Technical and consumer information 10-7 SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE Model Type Cylinder arrangement Bore x Stroke Displacement Firing order QR25DE Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC 4-cylinder in (mm) 3.504 x 3.937 (89.0 x 100.0) cu in (cm3) 151.82 (2,488) 1-3-4-2 Idle speed CVT (in N position) Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed) CO % at idle Spark plug Spark plug gap (Nominal) Camshaft operation This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002. 10-8 Technical and consumer information No adjustment is necessary. FXE20HE-11C in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) Timing chain WHEELS AND TIRES DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Wheel type Offset in (mm) Size Steel 1.38 (35) 17 x 7J Aluminum 1.38 (35) 17 x 7J Aluminum 1.38 (35) 18 x 7J Aluminum 1.57 (40) 19 x 7J T-type (Steel spare) 1.18 (30) 16 x 4T T-type (Steel spare) 1.18 (30) 17 x 4T Tires Size Overall length Overall width Overall height with All-wheel drive with front wheel drive Front and Rear Track Wheelbase Gross vehicle weight rating Gross axle weight rating Front Rear in (mm) in (mm) 184.5 (4,686) 72.4 (1,840) in (mm) 68.5 (1,741) in (mm) 68.0 (1,726) in (mm) 62.8 (1,595) in (mm) 106.5 (2,706) lbs. (kg) Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M. V.S.S. certification label” on lbs. (kg) the center pillar between lbs. (kg) the driver’s side front and rear doors. 225/65R17 225/60R18 225/55R19 Spare tires Temporary spare T145/90D16 Temporary spare T155/90D17 Technical and consumer information 10-9 WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING IN ANOTHER COUNTRY VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle's engine. Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations. The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ. LTI2050 LTI2270 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (chassis number) The VIN plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration. The vehicle identification number is located as shown. When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result. 10-10 Technical and consumer information WTI0096 ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER The number is stamped on the engine as shown. WTI0099 LTI2072 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully. The emission control information label is attached to the underside of the hood as shown. Technical and consumer information 10-11 INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE LTI2251 LTI2271 TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. The label is located as shown. The air conditioner specification label is affixed to the underside of the hood as shown. LTI2352 NOTE: This procedure shows the installation of one style of front license plate bracket. The procedures for installing other styles of front license plate brackets is the same as shown below. To mount the front license plate, attach the license plate bracket to the bumper fascia at the location marks (small dimples) using A . the two provided screws 䊊 10-12 Technical and consumer information VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION WARNING ∙ It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. ∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. ∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. TERMS It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle: ∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo. ∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo. ∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. ∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. ∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified of the load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label. ∙ Cargo capacity - permissible weight of cargo, the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit. ∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight rating) - The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer. Technical and consumer information 10-13 VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. Both the GVWR and GAWR are located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. For additional information, refer to “Measurement of weights” in this section. Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as “The combined weight of occupants and cargo” on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as “Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Information label. To get “the combined weight of occupants and cargo”, add the weight of all occupants, then add the total luggage weight. Examples are shown in the following illustration. LTI2320 Example 10-14 Technical and consumer information Steps for determining correct load limit 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information label. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs. or XXX kg. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) = 650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) = 300 kg.) 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Measurement of weights” in this section. Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. For additional information, refer to the “Tire and Loading Information label” in this section. LIC2629 Cargo area luggage hooks SECURING THE LOAD There are luggage hooks (if so equipped) located in the cargo area as shown. The hooks can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps. When securing items using luggage hooks located on the side finisher do not apply a load over more than 6.5 lbs. (29 N) to a single hook. The luggage hooks that are located on the floor should have loads less than 110 lbs. (490 N) to a single hook. Technical and consumer information 10-15 WARNING ∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. ∙ The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area. Secure any items in the cargo area. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged. ∙ Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. LOADING TIPS ∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. ∙ Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR. WARNING ∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. ∙ Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. 10-16 Technical and consumer information ∙ Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire, but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer braking distances. This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle’s warranty. MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the GAWR. The total of the axle loads should not exceed the GVWR. These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings. TOWING A TRAILER WARNING Overloading or improper loading of a trailer and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance and may lead to accidents. CAUTION ∙ Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load for the first 500 miles (805 km). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. ∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. NOTE: Tow hitches are available as an accessory for this vehicle. If a tow hitch is installed, the liftgate electronic control unit (ECU) needs to be replaced with an ECU programmed with towing logic for the Motion-Activated Liftgate to function properly. Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, braking and other systems. A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This guide includes information on trailer towing capability and the special equipment required for proper towing. MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS LTI2105 Maximum trailer loads Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the “Towing Load/Specification” chart found in this section. The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight. The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) should not exceed the value specified in the following Towing Load/Specification Chart. The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo) plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance. The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appropriate for level highway driving may have to be reduced for low traction situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps). Technical and consumer information 10-17 Temperature conditions can also affect towing. For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside temperatures on graded roads can affect engine performance and cause overheating. The engine protection mode, which helps reduce the chance of engine damage, could activate and automatically decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather and road conditions. CAUTION Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties. WARNING Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driving speed, pull to the side of the road in a safe area. Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation. For additional information, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. 10-18 Technical and consumer information WTI0160 Tongue load When using a weight carrying or a weight distributing hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 - 15% of the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load specified by the trailer manufacturer. The tongue load must be within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the following “Towing Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load. Towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load. The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity. LTI2106 Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)/maximum Gross Axle Weight (GAW) The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The GVW equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops, highway weigh stations, building supply centers or salvage yards. To determine the available payload capacity for tongue/king pin load, use the following procedure. 1. Locate the GVWR on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. 2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of the passengers and cargo that are normally in the vehicle when towing a trailer. 3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GVWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum tongue/king pin load. To determine the available towing capacity, use the following procedure. 1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the "Towing Load/Specification" chart found in this section. 2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GCWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum towing capacity. To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the trailer and is not more than the calculated available maximum towing capacity. Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The Technical and consumer information 10-19 cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to be moved or removed to meet the specified ratings. 7,250 lbs. (3,289 kg) – 6,350 lbs. (2,880 kg) = 900 lbs. (409 kg) Example: ∙ Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed on a scale - including passengers, cargo and hitch - 6,350 lbs. (2,880 kg). ∙ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label - 7,250 lbs. (3,289 kg). GVW Available for tongue weight 15,100 lbs. (6,849 kg) GCWR – 6,350 lbs. (2,880 kg) GVW = 9,123 lbs. (4,138 kg) Capacity available for towing ∙ Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) from “Towing Load/Specification" chart - 15,100 lbs. (6,849 kg). ∙ Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Towing Load/Specification" chart 9,100 lbs. (4,128 kg). GVWR 900 lbs. (409 kg) / 8,750 lbs. (3,969 kg) = Available tongue weight Available capacity 10 % tongue weight The available towing capacity may be less than the maximum towing capacity due to the passenger and cargo load in the vehicle. Remember to keep trailer tongue weight between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the trailer tongue load specification recommended by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to obtain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the maximum tongue weight specification shown in the 10-20 Technical and consumer information “Towing Load/Specification” chart even if the calculated available tongue weight is greater than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less than 10%, reduce the total trailer weight to match the available tongue weight. Always verify that available capacities are within the required ratings. TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION WARNING The towing capacities provided in this manual are for general reference only. The safe towing capacity of your vehicle is affected by dealer and factory installed options and passenger and cargo loads. You must weigh the vehicle and trailer as described in this manual to determine the actual vehicle towing capacity. Do not exceed the published maximum towing capacity or the GCWR or the GVWR shown on the FMVSS/CMVSS label. Doing so can result in an accident causing serious personal injury or property damage. TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART U.S. and Canada Maximum Towing Capacity*1 1,102 lbs. (500 kg) Maximum Tongue Load 110 lbs. (50 kg) Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 5,291 lbs. (2,400 kg) *1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity. TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional trailer tow package. The trailer tow package includes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. This hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is used. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine NISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are available from a NISSAN dealer. If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional trailer tow package, check the towing capacity of your bumper hitch or receiver-type frame mounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. A Genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available from a NISSAN dealer. Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks. Technical and consumer information 10-21 WARNING Trailer hitch components have specific weight ratings. Your vehicle may be capable of towing a trailer heavier than the weight rating of the hitch components. Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch components. Doing so can cause serious personal injury or property damage. Hitch ball Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight rating for your trailer: ∙ The required hitch ball size is stamped on most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also have the size printed on the top of the ball. ∙ Choose the proper class hitch ball based on the trailer weight. ∙ The diameter of the threaded shank of the hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole in the ball mount. ∙ The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount. There should be at least 2 threads showing beyond the lock washer and nut. Ball mount The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver. Choose a proper class ball mount based on the trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the ground. Weight carrying hitches A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball mount is one that is designed to carry the whole amount of tongue weight and gross weight directly on the ball mount and on the receiver. Weight distribution hitch This type of hitch is also called a “loadleveling” or “equalizing” hitch. A set of bars attach to the ball mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue weight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles can’t carry the full tongue weight of a given trailer, and need some of the tongue 10-22 Technical and consumer information weight transferred through the frame and pushing down on the front wheels. This gives stability to the tow vehicle. A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV) is recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg). Check with the trailer and towing equipment manufacturers to determine if they recommend the use of a weightdistributing hitch system. NOTE: A weight-distributing hitch system may affect the operation of trailer surge brakes. If you are considering use of a weight-distributing hitch system with a surge brake-equipped trailer, check with the surge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer to determine if and how this can be done. Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the weight-distributing hitch system. General set-up instructions are as follows: 1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition on and the doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it can level. 2. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle. 3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper height is within 0 .5 inches (0 – 13 mm) of the reference height measured in step 2. The rear bumper should be no higher than the reference height measured in step 2. WARNING Properly adjust the weight distributing hitch so the rear of the bumper is no higher than the measured reference height when the trailer is attached. If the rear bumper is higher than the measured reference height when loaded, the vehicle may handle unpredictably which could cause a loss of vehicle control and cause serious personal injury or property damage. Sway control device Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect trailer handling. Sway control devices may be used to help control these affects. If you choose to use one, contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway control device will work with the vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake system. Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the sway control device. Class I hitch attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safety chains can be attached to the bumper if the hitch ball is mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners. Trailer lights Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lbs. (907 kg). Tire pressures ∙ When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. ∙ Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturer’s specifications. Safety chains CAUTION When splicing into the vehicle electrical system, a commercially available power-type module/converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting. This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light, stop light and turn signal circuits as a signal source. The module/converter must draw no more that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp circuits. Using a module/converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicle’s electrical system. It is recommended that you visit a reputable trailer retailer to obtain the proper equipment and to have it installed. Always use suitable safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should be crossed and should be Technical and consumer information 10-23 Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or local regulations. For assistance in hooking up trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or reputable trailer retailer. Vehicles equipped with the optional trailer tow package are equipped with a 7-pin trailer harness connector. If your trailer is equipped with a flat 4-pin connector, an adapter will be needed to connect the trailer lights to the vehicle. Adapters are available at auto parts stores and hitch retailers. Pre-towing tips ∙ Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and/or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition. ∙ Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving. ∙ Keep the cargo load as low as possible in the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity low. ∙ Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in the back half. Also make sure the load is balanced side to side. ∙ Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, vehicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle. ∙ Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle. ∙ Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance is known. Trailer towing tips In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic. Steering stability and braking performance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions. ∙ Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving. 10-24 Technical and consumer information ∙ Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or lock to prevent the coupler from inadvertently becoming unlatched. ∙ Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops. ∙ Avoid sharp turns or lane changes. ∙ Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed. ∙ When backing up, hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Move your hand in the direction in which you want the trailer to go. Make small corrections and back up slowly. If possible, have someone guide you when you are backing up. Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so: CAUTION If you move the shift lever to the P (Park) position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur. 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal. 2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill side of the vehicle and trailer wheels. 3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly release the brake pedal until the blocks absorb the vehicle load. 4. Apply the parking brake. 5. Shift the transmission into P (Park). 6. Turn off the engine. To drive away: 1. Start the vehicle. 2. Apply and hold the brake pedal. 3. Shift the transmission into gear. 4. Release the parking brake. 5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are clear from the blocks. 6. Apply and hold the brake pedal. 7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks. ∙ While going downhill, the weight of the trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may decrease overall stability. Therefore, to maintain adequate control, reduce your speed and shift to a lower gear. Avoid long or repeated use of the brakes when descending a hill, as this reduces their effectiveness and could cause overheating. Shifting to a lower gear instead provides “engine braking” and reduces the need to brake as frequently. ∙ If the engine coolant temperature rises to a high temperature, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this owner’s manual. ∙ Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances. ∙ Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first 500 miles (805 km). ∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do tow, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h). ∙ Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified. For additional information, refer to "Maintenance schedules" in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual. ∙ When making a turn, your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn. ∙ Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling. Do the following if the trailer begins to sway: 1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as straight ahead as the road conditions allow. This combination will help stabilize the vehicle – Do not correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes. 2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the road in a safe area. 3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is balanced as described in this section. Technical and consumer information 10-25 ∙ Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing while towing a trailer requires considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember, the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes. ∙ Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50 miles (80 km) of travel and at every break. ∙ Downshift the transmission to a lower gear for engine braking when driving down steep or long hills. This will help slow the vehicle without applying the brakes. ∙ Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights before backing the trailer into the water or the trailer lights may burn out. ∙ Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency. ∙ Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually. ∙ NISSAN recommends that the cruise control not be used while towing a trailer. ∙ When launching a boat, don’t allow the water level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or rear bumper. When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmission oil/fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, refer to the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual. FLAT TOWING FOR ALL–WHEEL DRIVE VEHICLE (if so equipped) Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home. ∙ Some states or provinces have specific regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers. Obey the local speed limits. 10-26 Technical and consumer information CAUTION ∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage. ∙ Never flat tow your All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle. ∙ DO NOT tow your All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle with any wheels on the ground. Doing so may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain. ∙ For emergency towing procedures refer to “Towing recommended by NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. FLAT TOWING FOR FRONT WHEEL DRIVE VEHICLE (if so equipped) Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home. UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING CAUTION ∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage. ∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward. ∙ Never tow your front wheel drive vehicle with the front tires on the ground. Doing so may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain. ∙ DO NOT tow your front wheel drive continuously variable transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication. ∙ For emergency towing procedures refer to “Towing recommended by NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. Continuously Variable Transmission To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s recommendations when using their product. DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction AA, A, B and C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave- ment as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Temperature A, B and C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Technical and consumer information 10-27 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure. Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties: For USA 1. Emission Defects Warranty 2. Emissions Performance Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to: ∙ Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003 10-28 Technical and consumer information For Canada Emission Control System Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to: ∙ Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS For USA If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1. For Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying NISSAN. If Transport Canada receives complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may request that NISSAN conduct a recall campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN. fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers) or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/ Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/ fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers) Additional information concerning motor vehicle safety may be obtained from Transport Canada’s Road Safety Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/ securiteroutiere (French speakers). To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer Information Centre toll free at 1-800387-0122. You may contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may also report safety defects online at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/ Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/ Technical and consumer information 10-29 READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST WARNING A vehicle equipped with All -Wheel Drive (AWD) should never be tested using a two wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing), or similar equipment. Make sure you inform the test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with AWD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the I/M test, check the vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test readiness condition. Place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready condition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing. Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the “ready condition” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system. The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle. 10-30 Technical and consumer information This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: ∙ How various systems in your vehicle were operating; ∙ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; ∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, ∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling. ∙ Sounds are not recorded. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. ADDITIONAL DATA RECORDING (on vehicles equipped with optional ProPILOT Assist) The ProPILOT Assist does not record conversations, sounds or images of the inside of the vehicle. If your vehicle is equipped with the optional ProPILOT Assist, it will also be equipped with supplemental data recording function intended to assist in understanding how ProPILOT Assist performs in certain nontrivial crash or near-crash scenarios. Specifically, supplemental recording is designed to capture the following: To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or permitted by law. ∙ Driver operational status of the accelerator, brakes, steering, etc. To read this supplemental data, special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the recording unit is needed. This supplemental data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or permitted by law. If downloaded, NISSAN and third parties entrusted by NISSAN may use the data recorded for the purpose of improving NISSAN’s vehicle safety performance. ∙ Detection status of a vehicle ahead and lane markers ∙ Vehicle information including distance to vehicle ahead and lateral position ∙ Information on the operation of the ProPILOT Assist and other crash avoidance features ∙ ProPILOT Assist malfunction diagnosis information ∙ External images from the multi-sensing front camera (Available only when the SRS air bag or IEB system is activated) NISSAN and third parties entrusted by NISSAN will not disclose/provide the recorded data to a third party except: - With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee - In response to an official request from law enforcement, court order, governmental agency, or other legally enforceable request - For research purposes after the data is modified such that it is no longer tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner (anonymized) Technical and consumer information 10-31 OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model year and prior can be purchased. A Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be purchased. For USA For current pricing and availability of Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact: www.nissan-techinfo.com For current pricing and availability of Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact: 1-800-247-5321 For Canada To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this model year and prior, please contact the nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you. 10-32 Technical and consumer information 11 Index 2nd row bench seat adjustment . . . . . .1-6 A Active Ride Control (ARC) . . . . . . . . .5-160 Air bag (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-46 Air bag system Front (See supplemental front impact air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-54 Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . .1-65 Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . .1-66, 2-17 Air bag warning light, supplemental . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-66, 2-17 Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . .8-18 Air conditioner Air conditioner operation . . . .4-32, 4-38 Air conditioner specification label . .10-12 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Air conditioner system refrigerant recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Heater and air conditioner controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29, 4-38 Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . .4-41 Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33 Alarm system (See vehicle security system) . . . . . . .2-42 All-Wheel Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-148, 6-15 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK switch . . .5-149 Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . .1-29 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42 Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-167 Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-12 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-154 Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6 Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49 Automatic Automatic drive positioner . . . .3-41, 3-43 Automatic power window switch . . .2-72 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . .3-38 Automatic brake hold . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 Automatic drive positioner . . . . . .3-41, 3-43 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-16, 5-124 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection . . . . . . . . . . . .5-132 AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-148, 6-15 Brake Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . .5-154 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-30 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-153 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Brake wear indicators . . . . . .2-20, 8-22 Parking brake operation . . . . . . . .5-28 Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . .8-22 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-155 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-153 Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-146 Brightness control Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53 Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . .2-12 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30 C B Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-167, 8-13 Charge warning light. . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25 Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25 NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . .8-25, 8-27 Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-19 Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) . . . . . . . . . .5-46 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42 Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Cargo cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68 Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-78 Cargo (See vehicle loading information). . . . .10-13 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-42 Chassis control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-158 Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36 Child restraints . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-22, 1-24, 1-26 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26 Precautions on child restraints. . . . . . . . . .1-24, 1-31, 1-37, 1-42 Top tether strap anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29 Child restraint with top tether strap . . . .1-28 Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7 Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . .2-20 Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4 C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-11 Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-167 Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64 Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-76 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14, 5-21 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . .5-14, 5-21 Controls Heater and air conditioner controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29, 4-38 Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-5 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-5 Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-65 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65 11-2 D Defroster switch Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47 Dimensions and weights. . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-53 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5 Drive belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Drive positioner, Automatic . . . . . .3-41, 3-43 Driving Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . .5-167 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . .5-14, 5-21 Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-11 Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Dynamic driver assistance switch (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) . . .2-57 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-7 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-5 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-6 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3 Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6 Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . .8-4 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . .2-6 Event Data recorders. . . . . . . . .10-30, 10-31 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide). . . . . . .5-4 Explanation of maintenance items . . . . .9-2 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5 Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . .2-62 Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65 E E-call (SOS) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60 ECO mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-148 Emergency engine shutoff. . . . . . . . . .5-17 Emission control information label . . . .10-11 Emission control system warranty . . . .10-28 Engine Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-19 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-5 Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 F Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . .6-2 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-6 Fluid Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . .8-11 F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . .10-11 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54 Front air bag system (See supplemental restraint system) . . .1-54 Front-door pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63 Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-4 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-148 Fuel-filler door and cap. . . . . . . . . .3-34 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5 Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . .2-36 Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . .5-147 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 Fusible links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 Tachometer . . . . Trip odometer . . . General maintenance Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 . .2-5 . .9-2 .2-64 H Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . .6-2 Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-48 Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . .2-48 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28 Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8 Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55 Heated steering wheel switch . . . . . . .2-56 Heater Heater and air conditioner controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29, 4-38 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . .4-30, 4-39 Hill start assist system. . . . . . . . . . . .5-161 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . . . . . . . . .2-78, 2-79, 2-81, 2-82 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Hook Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55 G Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . . . . . . . . .2-78, 2-79, 2-81, 2-82 Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34 Gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 Indicator NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Indicator lights and audible reminders (See warning/indicator lights and audible reminders). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-17 Information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21 Inside automatic anti-glare mirror. . . . .3-38 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-53 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2 Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . .2-53 Intelligent Around View Monitor . . . . . . .4-11 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) . . .5-67 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) . . . .5-103 Intelligent Engine Brake (I-EB) . . . . . . .5-159 Intelligent Key system Key operating range. . . . . . . . . . . .3-12 Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13 Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 Remote keyless entry operation . . . .3-16 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . .3-20 Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20 Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) . . . . .5-40 Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) . . . . . . .5-158 Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-75, 2-77 ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26 I Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . .5-15 Immobilizer system . . . . . . .2-44, 5-15, 5-18 Important vehicle information label. . . .10-11 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19 Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . .5-148 J Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11, 8-16 11-3 K Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . . .8-25 Keyless entry With Intelligent Key system (See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . .3-16 Without Intelligent Key system (See remote keyless entry system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-8, 3-9 Keys NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . .3-3, 3-10 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 L Label Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12 Labels Air conditioner specification label . . .10-12 C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .10-11 Emission control information label . .10-11 Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . .10-11 F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . .10-11 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-65 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . .5-35 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26 LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52 11-4 License plate Installing the license plate . . . . . . .10-12 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26 Liftgate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31 Light Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-66, 2-17 Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-30 Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . .2-12 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-76 Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . .8-30 Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54 Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-48 Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . .2-48 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28 Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-75, 2-77 Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-14 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36 Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-57 Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77 Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . .2-76 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-17 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-76 Lock Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . .3-7 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5 Liftgate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31 Power door locks. . . . . . . . . . . .3-6, 3-7 Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . .2-36, 3-35 Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . .2-15, 2-36 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-14 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36 Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68 Luggage rack (see roof rack) . . . . . . . .2-70 Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . . . . .10-13 M Maintenance General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3 Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . .8-2 Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-21 Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . .9-4 Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11 Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . .9-2 Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7 Maintenance under severe operation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-3 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-76 Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41, 3-43 Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-53 Mirror Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . .3-38 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38 Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38 Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73, 7-5 Moving Object Detection (MOD) . . . . . .4-23 N NissanConnect® Owner's Manual . . . . . .4-2 NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . .3-3, 3-10 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44, 5-15, 5-18 O Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . .10-5 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 Oil Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-7 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-6 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40 Overhead sunglasses holder . . . . . . . .2-65 Overheat If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . .6-13 Owner's manual order form . . . . . . . .10-32 Owner's manual/service manual order information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-32 P R Parking Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-28 Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . .5-152 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . .2-13, 2-18, 5-28 Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77 Power Power door locks. . . . . . . . . . . .3-6, 3-7 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60 Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-72 Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-152 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-72 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-152 Precautions Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . .8-2 On-pavement and off-road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9 Precautions on booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24, 1-31, 1-37, 1-42 Precautions on child restraints. . . . . . . . . .1-24, 1-31, 1-37, 1-42 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-12 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-46 Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-11 ProPILOT Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-91 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13 Radio Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-42 Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-30 Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) . . . . . . .5-141 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA). . . . . . . .5-57 Rear Door Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41, 2-59 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72 Rear Sonar System (RSS) . . . . . . . . . .5-162 Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38 RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47 Rear window wiper and washer switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46 Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Recorders Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-30, 10-31 Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . .10-7 Registering a vehicle in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . .3-22, 5-21 Remote keyless entry system . . .3-2, 3-8, 3-9 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-29 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-70 S Safety Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . .3-7 Child seat belts . . . . . .1-24, 1-31, 1-37, 1-42 Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-29 11-5 Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3 Front power seat adjustment . . . . . .1-4 Second row bench seats . . . . . . . . .1-6 Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63 Seat belt Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21 Infants and small children . . . . . . . .1-22 Injured Person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-12 Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-21 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12, 7-7 Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-19 Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-15 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . .1-15, 2-17 Seats 2nd row bench seat adjustment . . . . .1-6 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6 Automatic drive positioner . . . .3-41, 3-43 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55 Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3 Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . . .2-44, 5-15, 5-18 Security systems Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-42 Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22 Service manual order form. . . . . . . . .10-32 Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . .4-41 Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-19 11-6 Sonar Rear system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-162 Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-18 Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . .2-4 SPORT mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . .2-76 SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-65 Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . .9-8, 9-8 Starting Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-19 Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11, 8-16 Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-11 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Starting the engine (models with NISSAN Intelligent Key® system) . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Steering Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-152 Steering Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) . . . . .2-57 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63 Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65 Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73, 7-5 Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . .2-73 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-65 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-66, 2-17 Supplemental front impact air bag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-54 Supplemental restraint system Information and warning labels . . . .1-65 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-46 Supplemental restraint system (Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . .1-46 Switch Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49 Automatic power window switch . . .2-72 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54 Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2 Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-48 Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . .2-48 Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-53 Power door lock switch . . . . . . . .3-6, 3-7 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47 Rear window wiper and washer switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53 T Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 Temperature gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6 Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44, 5-15, 5-18 Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5 Tire Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 Spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 8-43 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39 Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32 Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38 Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . .10-27 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32 Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Tire pressure Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-14 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . .5-5 Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . .1-28 Towing 4-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-16 Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-26 Towing load/specification . . . . . . .10-20 Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17 Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17 Transceiver HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . . . . . . .2-78, 2-79, 2-81, 2-82 Transmission Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . .5-14, 5-21 Travel (See registering a vehicle in another country). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53 U Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . .10-27 USB/iPod® Charging Ports . . . . . . . . .4-42 V Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37 Variable voltage control system . . . . . .8-17 Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . .10-9 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-155 Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) (Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Vehicle immobilizer system . .2-44, 5-15, 5-18 Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . . . .2-21 Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . .10-13 Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16, 6-17 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-42 Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44, 5-15, 5-18 Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28 Visors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37 W Warning Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-66, 2-17 Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . .2-12 Battery charge warning light . . . . . .2-13 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2 Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . .2-36, 3-35 Low fuel warning light . . . . . . .2-15, 2-36 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-14 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36 Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-57 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . .1-15, 2-17 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-66, 2-17 TPMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-42 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-17 Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-65 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-17 Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-17 Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-17 Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-17 Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-17 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11 Washer switch Rear window wiper and washer switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46 Weights (See dimensions and weights) . .10-9 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32 Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 When traveling or registering in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71 Locking passengers' windows . . . . .2-71 Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-72 11-7 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-72 Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . .8-20 Wiper Rear window wiper and washer switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46 Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20 Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .2-45 11-8 MEMO MEMO MEMO MEMO GAS STATION INFORMATION FUEL RECOMMENDATION: Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91). CAUTION ∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door label can operate on E-85. Fuel system or other damage can occur if E-85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E-85. ∙ Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage. ∙ Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst. ∙ Do not use a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol. Using a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in a vehicle not specifically designed for a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol can adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ∙ Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel containing MMT may adversely affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline. ∙ U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region. For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION: For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. COLD TIRE PRESSURE: For additional information, refer to “Tire and Loading Information label” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual. RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURE: During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Break-in schedule” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life. Printing : October 2019 Publication No.: OM20EA 0T32U1 Printed in the U.S.A. T32-D